ANNEXURE “B” TO Corrigendum no.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR KORIYAWAS MEDICAL COLLEGE

STRUCTURED CABLING

Technical Specification 6 Core Singlemode Fibre optic Cable

Details Specification Compliance

Cable 6 Core Singlemode 9/125, Central Loose Tube Cables, High mechanical and full
rodent protection provided by Outdoor – Corrugated Steel Tape Armor (CST),
complying to both 9/125 ITU G.652D & G.657A1 BI standards

Application Cable should be suitable for Structured (premises) wiring systems: For outdoor
use in structured (data) wiring systems such as industrial backbone, campus
backbone, building backbone (riser). Suitable for direct burial. Easy to install in
ducts, tunnels and trenches.

Jacket Black UV resistant PE outer jacket.

Water swellable E-glass yarns as strength members and for the longitudinal
watertightness, surrounded by swelling tape.

Loose Tube Std. plywood reel: Ø 1000 * 588 mm,

Construction
Central tube, jelly filled (non-dripping and silicon-free). Individually colour coded
optical fibres:

1 – 6: red – natural – yellow – blue – green – violet

Optical Core: 9.2 +/- 0.4 um

Properties
Cladding: 125 +/- 0.7 um

Loose Tube fibres: Ø 250 ± 15 µm

1310 Wavelength (nm) : 0.33 / 0.34 Attenuation typical/ max. (dB/km)

1550 Wavelength (nm) : 0.18 / 0.19 Attenuation typical/ max. (dB/km)

1625 Wavelength (nm) : 0.20 / 0.24 Attenuation typical/ max. (dB/km)

Dispersion (ps/ (nm-km)) @ 1310 nm: ≤ 3.2

Dispersion (ps/ (nm-km)) @ 1550 nm: ≤ 17

Cutoff Wavelength : ≤ 1260 nm

PMD (ps/km) : ≤ 0.06

Warranty & Std. delivery length: 2100 ± 105m

Putup
Predicted lifetime > 30 years.
 Minimum Warranty: 25 years.

Temperature Storage Temperature Range: -30 to +70 °C

Range
Installation Temperature Range: -5 to +50 °C

Operating Temperature Range: -30 to +70 °C

Physical Watertightness according to IEC 60794-1-22-F5 : Yes

Properties
Crush resistance according to IEC 60794-1-21-E3

Bending radii tube (Installation & Operation) >25 mm

Cable Min. Bend Radius Operation (Long Term): 20 x Cable Diam.

Cable Min. Bend Radius Installation (Short Term): 20 x Cable Diam.

Cable Max. Tensile Strength Operation (Long Term): 730 N

Cable Max. Tensile Strength Installation (Short Term): 2220 N

Cable Max. Crush Resistance Operation (Long Term): 11 kN/m

Cable Max. Crush Resistance Installation (Short Term): 22 kN/m

Nominal Cable OD : 9.3 mm Max.

Bend Maximum Attenuation increase for Bend Insensitive Fibers

Insensitive
Optical 9/125 G.657A1 Bend Insensitive
Properties
1550 (nm): 0.03dB (Turns 100 Radius 30 mm), 0.25 dB (Turns 10 Radius 15 mm),
0.75 dB (Turns 1 Radius 10 mm)

1625 (nm): 0.03 dB (Turns 100 Radius 30 mm), 1.0 dB (Turns 10 Radius 15 mm),
1.5 dB (Turns 1 Radius 10 mm)

Technical Specification of Rack Mount Fibre Enclosure

Details Specification Compliance

Fiber Patch Panel Typically used in Server rooms, Network rooms,

Data Centres and Small offices Can be mounted directly on any 19"
Fiber Interface Unit rack or cabinet. It should be able to accommodate a variety of
Fiber connectors and terminated to fiber cables using Splicing or
other methods.

Fiber LIU should be 1U (1.75”), 19 Inch Rack Mount.

Type 12/24/48 Port should be available in 1U Rack Mount LIU.

LC Type Connectors will be required.

 Each 1U LIU should be able to accommodate atleast 48 fibers in LC
type connectors.

24 Fiber Splice trays should be included with LIU.

Each 1U panel should take at least 2 universal adapter strips

allowing flexible and customized patch panel design.

Universal Optical fiber adapter strips shall provide the connecting

Features & interface between two optical fiber connectors.

Compatibility Adapter Strips should be preloaded with adapters/couplers

Duplex.

Adapter strip should be of Black Color with different colored

couplers

Adapter strips should be available for both Single-mode and

Multimode.

Adapter strips should be available in LC/SC/ST types.

Standard Fiber LIU should comply to ISO 2768-1

Fiber Patch Cords, LC-LC Duplex, Singlemode OS2, 3MT

Details Specification Compliance

Type 2mm Duplex Zipcord.
Singlemode OS2, Yellow Color
Outside Diameter (Duplex): 2.0mm x 3.0mm or as per design
Jacket Material LSZH
Length 3 MT
Minimum Cable 2.0/3.0mm: 200 N Tensile Strength

RetentionLoss
Insertion Strength 2.0/3.0mm:
≤ 0.3 dB 1000 N Crush Resistance
Return Loss ≥ 50dB @ 1310nm
RoHS Certified Yes

Pigtail, SC-LC Type , Singlemode OS2, 2 MT, Yellow Color

Details Specification Compliance

Type Optical Fiber Pigtail LC - Simplex, Singlemode OS2 , 2 Mtr, Yellow

Color

Feature Tight Buffer construction (0.9mm)

Singlemode OS2 should be of Yellow Color

 2 Meter Length

Standard Optical Fiber Pigtail should comply with TIA/EIA 568-C.3.

Minimum Cable Optical Fiber Pigtail should have Max. Tensile Strength of 30N
(Short Term).
Retention Strength
Optical Fiber Pigtail should have Max. Crush Resistance of 100
N/100 (Short Term).

Optical Performance Optical Fiber Pigtail should have Insertion Loss of <=0.3dB @
1310nm for OS2 as per TIA/EIA 568-C.3

Optical Fiber Pigtail should have Return Loss of >=50dB @ 1310nm

for OS2 as per TIA/EIA 568-C.3

RoHS Certified RoHS Complaint

CAT6 U/UTP 4 Pair LSZH CABLE, LSZH, IEC 60332-3-22 (Cat A) Flame Retardant

Details Specification Compliance

Type 23 AWG Solid Bare Copper, Unshielded Twisted 4 Pair, Category 6,

TIA / EIA 568 C.2, ISO/IEC 11801 & UL 444 standard.

NEMA WC-63.1 Category 6

Conductors Solid bare copper

Insulation Polyethylene/Polyolefin

Nominal Diameter of 1.0 mm

Jacket LSZH jacket complying to:

Test Report needs to be submitted along with bid

Fire rating IEC 60332-3-22 (Category A)

Halogen Content per IEC 60754-1 : ≤ 5 mg/g

Acid Gas Emission pH per IEC 60754-2 : ≥ 4.3

Acid Gas Conductivity per IEC 60754-2 : ≤ 10µs/mm

Smoke density IEC 61034-2 : ≥ 60% Light Transmittance

Pair Separator Cross-member (+) fluted Spline.

Approvals UL & Third Party verified to ANSI/TIA Cat 6, ISO 11801 for Class E
Frequency tested up to 250 250 MHz; Third Party Verified channel performance upto 250
Mhz ONLY MHz to be provided.

Packing Box of 305 meters

Cable Outer Diameter 5.8 mm

Delay Skew 45 ns @ 100Mhz

Bend Radius 4 * Cable Diameter

Impedance 100 Ohms + / - 15 ohms,

Mutual Capacitance 5.6 NF MAX /100 Mtr.

Conductor Resistance 9.38 Ohms Max /100 mtr

Velocity of Propagation 65%

Delay

Max. Attenuation : 33 dB/100m

Min. NEXT : 39.3 dB

Min. PS NEXT : 36.3 dB

Performance Min. Return Loss : 17.3 dB
characteristics @ 250 MHz
Min. ACRF : 20.0 dB

Min. PSACRF : 17.0 dB

TCL : 26

ROHS Compliant ROHS/ELV Compliant

Operating Temperature -20 to +75 Deg C

Range

24 Port, 1U Angled Jack Panel, Unloaded

24 PORT ANGLED UNLOADED JACK PANEL, 1U

Parameters Specifications Compliance

Type -24 Port 1U Unloaded Straight Patch Panel with Discrete Angled
Modules

-Patch panels IDC (IDC of Information Outlet) Connectivity should

be at rear end & RJ-45 jack on front panel, 19" rack mountable.

-Patch panels Ports should be individually replaceable & Consistent

 port-to-port performance.

Availability Patch Panel should be available with 24 Ports in 1U and 48 ports in

2U.

Cable management -The modules in Patch panel should have sideways orientation of
Information Outlet that makes patch cord routing easier and
eliminate the need for Horizontal Cable Management.

-Patch Panel to be supplied with four removable Inserts/modules

with 6 no. of IO slot per Module

Compatibility Patch Panel should be able to accept Cat6A, Cat6 and Cat5e
information outlets for backward and forward compatibility

Height 1U (1.75”)

Storage Temperature -40Deg C to +70 Deg C

Range

Operating Temperature -10Deg C to +60 Deg C

range

Color and Material Steel, 16 gauge, powder paint finish, black, plastic inserts, UL94V-0
plastic, Black. Cable support bar should be provided separately
with panel.

Applicable Standards & RoHS complied with ACA safety

Environmental
Programs

Cat 6 Unshielded Patch Cords, LSZH, 2 MT & 3 MT, Dark Blue

Details Specification Compliance

Type Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-C.2 & ISO/IEC 11801,
IEC 60603-7, FCC Part 68 Subpart F Specifications.

Conductor Cat6 Patch Cord should be 4 Twisted Pair, 24 AWG Stranded Bare Copper
Conductors.

Contact Blade should be Phosphor bronze plated with 50u’’ gold over
100u’’ nickel undercoat.

Length 2 MT , 3 MT

Plug Protection Factory fitted Strain relief boots on either side

Performance Max. Current Rating should be 1.5 Amp

Characteristics Min. Insulation Resistance should be 100MOhm

Max. Contact Resistance should be 20mOhm

Dielectric Strength should be 1000 VAC (RMS)

Voltage Rating should be 30 VAC Maximum.

Jacket LSZH

Color Dark Blue

Operating The patch cord should have

Environment Range
Insertion Life of 750 mating cycles

Pull force of min. 89 Newton,

Humidity 10% to 90% R.H.,

Temperature range of -10 Deg C to +60 Deg C

Boot Injection Molding Technology for better strength

CAT6+ Unshielded Modular Jack, Keyconnect Style

Parameters Specifications Compliance

Cat6+ Modular Jacks shall meet and exceed channel specification

of Category 6 transmission requirements for connecting
hardware, as specified in Commercial building
Type
telecommunications Cabling standard and ISO/IEC 11801:2002
second edition. when used as a component in a properly installed
UTP channel.

Front Connection Lead Frame : Copper Allow with 50u inch Gold over Nickel

Rear Connection IDC: Copper Allow with Nickel Plating

Connector Body Plastic: UL940V-0

Housing Encapsulated Lead Frame technology

-Jack should support uniform hassle free termination technology

and be able to ensure performance in each termination without
dependency on expertise of technician.
Accessories

- Integrated bend-limiting strain-relief unit for cable entry with

 locking facility at IDC contact point

- Support cable pair termination process on the jacks at 90

degree angle.

Front Mated Connection: 1000 Cycles

Termination Interface
Rear Mated Connection: 20 Cycles (Gas Tight IDC Connection)

Jack Details Connector/hardware retention of at least 88.5 N

Plug /connector retention of at least 50N

Storage temperature range of -40 Deg C to +70 Deg C.

IEEE Specification (PoE) IEEE 802.3at type 1 and 2 (up to 30W). CoC to be provided.

Termination Pattern TIA / EIA 568 A and B

Performance 4.8 Gbps support for 100 MT Channel Link

Guaranteed Bandwidth 300 Mhz Guaranteed Bandwidth for 100 MT Channel Link

UL Listed
Approvals (Proof to be
provided along with Bid) ETL verified to TIA / EIA Cat 6. Should be part of the registered 4
connector channel as per Intertek / ETL report

UL Rating UL 94V-0

Other Specifications UL 1863, IEC 60603-7, FCC part 68-F

RoHS Compliant

Safety listing ACA and Bi-national standard listed.

Operating Temperature -10° to 60°C

Dielectric Strength 1,000 V RMS @ 60 Hz for 1 minute (Signals to Ground)

Performance
Characteristics to be Technical Datasheet should have Worst Case Performance
provided with bid for 1 – parameters for IL, NEXT, FEXT, Return Loss and Balanced TCL
300 MHz

Insertion Loss: Max. 0.31 dB

Electrical Performance
NEXT: Min. 44.5 dB
@ 300 Mhz
FEXT: Min. 37.6 dB
 RL: Min. 18.5 dB

Balanced TCL: Min 22.5 dB

Termination of cable on IO through Universal Termination Tool to

minimize any manual termination like punch down.

All the four pairs should get crimped and cut together with the
Termination Process
help of the tool.

Pairs should be separated via T-Bar in termination process to

avoid any cross talk issue at Jack.

Should be covered under 25 year warranted solution from OEM.

Cat6 Jack All the four pairs should get crimped and cut together with the
help of the tool.

Face Plate, UK Style, Almond Color, Square with Shutters

Details Specification Compliance

Type Simplex/Duplex

Material Fire -retardant Plastic, ABS, Almond color, UK Style.

Should be able to accept Cat6A, Cat6 and Cat5e information

Acceptability outlets

Approvals UL94V0

2 Plates/Pieces Face Plate for better aesthetic look (Premium

No. of plates Type)

Mounting screws 2 pcs, M3.5 x 25mm, with covers

Compliant RoHS

Dimensions (H x W x D) 86 x 86 x 14.42 mm
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IP-PBX SYSTEM

[Link]. Description Compliance

1 IP Telephony System Architecture

The IP telephony system must be based on a pure IP technology that is a software-only solution.

The IP telephony system must support unified communication (UC) server & gateways
architecture for SIP, Digital and Analog trunks connectivity.

The system must be capable of supporting Analog, Digital, IP Telephones, and SIP based video
desk phones.

The communication servers must work in an Active/Active redundancy mode. It should be

possible to define servers load balancing mode.

All servers must be provided in a cluster mode. If one cluster server fails, one of the other
cluster servers in the network must be able to take the complete load of the calls automatically
(without any manual intervention) and without dropping any existing calls (IP,TDM & PRI) or
data (CDR, CTI). Management of all servers in cluster should be from same web page. All
servers should have same database.

The telephony system must be able to register SIP phones/SIP video phones and MGCP
phones directly to it

System should have Distributed Architecture

It should be possible to install Telephony system in VMware EXSi 5.5 or higher.

All Data (Numbers, COS, Routing, Applications) should reside in all the Servers

Database replication in All servers should be automatic and real time

Should support N+1 Redundancy Architecture as well as 1+1 redundancy Architecture

Should support Remote Survival Nodes

In case of failure of one server, the SIP Phones, SIP Gateways, MGCP Phones should register with
second Server automatically

System Diagnostics should be done in Server

Hot Standby for SIP Phones and Gateways i.e SIP Phones and Gateways should register
automatically to next available telephony server.

COTS - commercial off-the-shelf Servers should be used for telephony system

Telephony system should use Linux Operating System

system should support CSTA phase III Protocol

Full continuation for call signalling and media must be supported

Calls must not be disconnected and control must remain throughout the swap to an alternate
server including full call control (transfer, conference actions, continuation of CDR data for the
existing call).

Load Balancing of end points must be possible by the administrator

There must be no restriction on the number of endpoints being backed up in case of one server
failure.

UC platform servers must provide full failover and redundancy

System should support the following SIP RFCs:

RFC 3261 (SIP: Session Initiation Protocol)

RFC 3262 (Reliability of Provisional Responses in Session Initiation Protocol)

RFC 3263 (Locating SIP Servers)

RFC 3264 (An Offer/Answer Model with Session Description Protocol (SDP))

RFC 3265 (Specific Event Notification)

RFC 2327 (SDP- Session Description Protocol)

RFC 1889 and 1890 (RTP/RTCP)

RFC 3515 (REFER)

RFC 2833 (DTMF over IP)

Scalability

It should be possible to add more sites and users without the need to change the software and
existing configuration.

The system must be scalable to at least 25,000 endpoints in a single cluster architecture.

Each server must support a minimum of 1000 endpoints

The call signalling server must handle traffic at a minimum of 100K BHCC.

The system must be modular, scalable and distributable

System Survivability

The UC platform must consist of one or many servers where each server in the cluster provides
complete 100% application functionality.

In case of a failed server, all endpoints registered with that server need to register instantly with
a different server in the cluster with no interruption to on-going calls.

Media Gateways must have survival mechanisms that allow them to maintain 100% of the
telephony services for their users in case of failure in the WAN links when the signalling with the
call server drops.

The life cycle of the entire system being provided must be at least Ten (10) years.

The system gateway must be able to restart automatically without human intervention when
the external AC power supply is resumed after complete power failure (even after the batteries
are discharged).

The telephony system must be capable of providing 99.999% availability.

Distributed Architecture

The UC platform must have distributed architecture and centralized control for all the sites in
the network.

The proposed solution must support Hybrid cloud solution in order to guarantee business
continuity with overall survivability regardless of a failure at any single location.

The proposed solution must enable part of the cluster to be hosted in a Cloud Service Provider
(CSP) to run all applications.

The proposed solution must have built in redundancy using a cloud solution to provide
automatic disaster recovery option.

The proposed solution should have provision to be installed using an image of the application an
easily implemented on the Cloud Service Provider servers.

Quality of Service (QOS)

The voice and signalling frames must be marked [tagged] in order to be recognized.

Server – Physical Attributes

COTS – Commercial Off-the-Shelf servers must be used.

The redundant server must have separate hardware, not sharing elements like hard drives and
RAM etc., to avoid a single point of failure.

The server should have AC power supply.

The system must be based on server gateway architecture with external appliance servers

No card based processor systems / soft switch should be quoted.

The call processor must run on Linux OS.

Minimum Server Specifications:

The CPU must be from the Intel® Xeon® processor E3-1220v5 or latest

The server must have at least 8GB RAM

The server must have Hard Drives (300GB each) of storage

The server must have a Dual 1GB network interface.

Form Factor for physical server (Not Virtual Machine) should be 1 U

Gateways

The media gateways shall be capable of being centrally managed via the telephony
management application. The system should support multiple gateways.

The system gateway should be able to restart automatically without human intervention when
the external ac power supply is resumed after complete power failure

The system gateways should support the following type of extensions:

Analog

Digital

Cordless (DECT) Extension

SIP

MGCP

The system gateway should support the following type of trunks :

Analog: E&M (2W), E&M (4W), DC loop signaling, decadic, DTMF

Digital: 2Mb stream with the following signaling protocols (Digital CEPT, R2MFC)
Standard ISDN BRI, PRI

SIP and MGCP on VOIP

ISDN (30B+D / 23B+D / 2B+D)

SS7

ISDN QSIG (30B+D / 2B+D)

Q-sig over IP

Security

Administration of the system should be using HTTPS

It should support the Interop with leading SBC

System should use TLS (Transport Layer protocol) to encrypt SIP, HTTP, FTP and SRTP (Secure
Real-time Transport Protocol) and SRTCP to encrypt RTP and RTCP

System should have auto Provisioning profiles contain pre-configured sets of features that must
automatically polls and updates registered phones with the latest phone firmware and
configuration files.

Mobility

The system should have Call Back feature. If the user dials his own extension from predefined
number ( mobile/landline) then system should disconnect the call and then system shoud call
the user to provide the dialtone so that user can make intercom or PSTN calls.

The system should have Call Through feature. If the user dials his own extension from
predefined number then system should provide dialtone to make intercom or o/g calls.

The system should have FlexiCall (Forking, reach-me-anywhere) feature. Users should be able to
receive calls on any of their phones, from almost anywhere. An incoming call rings on all or
specific phones until the user answers the call. The user can transfer the call, establish a
conference, and so on, whether the answering device is an internal device, an external phone,
or a cellular handset. If the answering phone is an external device, the call automatically
becomes an authorized mobility call.

The system should support SIP Client on smart phone.

SIP Endpoints

All SIP phones must support the standard SIP protocol. No proprietary protocols are allowed to
be used.
SIP phones must support the configuration of programmable buttons with functions such as
Break-in, Conference call, Deflect, silent monitoring and more.

SIP phones must work in conjugation with the following applications:

1. Contact Centre (Agents Phones)

2. Attendant Console

3. Managed Audio Conferencing

4. Managed Video Conferencing

5. UC clients

ACD

System should have built in Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with following features:

Busy ACD Group announcement

Hunt Group Release

IVR-ACD

Log In / Log Out

Multiple Announcements:

1. Mandatory announcement - All incoming callers to an ACD/HUNT group must be able to hear
an introductory announcement in its entirety usually explaining about the company, product, or
campaign.

2. First announcement - If all agents are busy, callers must be able to hear this announcement
once usually informing them that their call has been placed in queue. (The system must be able
to cut short this announcement if an agent becomes available to attend to the caller.)

3. Music - If no agents are available after the first announcement (or no First and Periodic
announcers have been configured), the caller must be able to hear background music while in
queue.

4. Periodic announcement - Alternating with background music, these announcements can also
be played to callers in queue according to the Periodic Announcement Interval (see above) until
the ACD/HUNT call is answered.

Release / Resume

Wait Queue
Wrap-Up Time

Automatic Release of ACD Agent

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Extended Overflow

Zone Page

A phone user must be able to simultaneously broadcast a message over all types of endpoints.

The maximum quantity of endpoints in one zone should not be less than 100.

System Administration

System administration should be web based.

All programming of system should be done through a web-based GUI interface.

The administrator should have Dynamic Profiles.

The system should allow for complete multi-level administration. The administrator must be
able to define at least five (5) different administration level profiles that can be applied to allow
subsets of users to access and manage particular pages in the systems Web Portal

Certification Requirements

1. The OEM must comply with ISO 9001 certification in all the company’s activities.

2. The products must comply with Safety and EMC standards, including FCC, UL/TUV, CE,
and the RoHS directive.

System Features

ANI (Caller ID) Restriction

ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

Auto Attendant

Call Forward at Night/Holiday

Call Forward Destinations

Call Forward for Undefined Stations

Call Forward on Busy

Call Forward on DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Forward on Logout

Call Forward on No Answer

Caller id based routing for individual extension

Deflect (Divert) Call

Digit Train Conversion

Direct-In-Dial

Direct-In-Line (DIL)

Hot Line

Interactive Voice Response (IVR)

Least Cost Routing

Look Ahead Routing (LAR)

Numbering Plan

Personal Routing Rules based on caller id and DNIS

Predetermined Night Answer

Toll Restriction – Digit Analysis

Toll Restriction – Trunk Groups

Trunk to Trunk Connection

Trunk Transfer Restriction

Classes of Service

Night Answer Central Bell / UNA Pickup

Page Queue

Recall

Recall / Incomplete Destination

Second Ring back Tone

Speed Dial Public (System) and Private

Virtual Numbers

Music On Hold

Voice Page

Silent Monitor

Zone Page

Barge In

Wake up

Extension Features

Answer Call Waiting by Transfer

Auto Set Relocate

Auto-Answer

Automatic Disconnect

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Display

Browse Personal Directory

Busy Lamp Field

Call Forward All

Call Hold

Call Log

Call Parking and Call Pickup

Call Waiting

Caller ID Control

Caller-ID Screening

Caller id based routing for individual extension

Calling Number and Name

Camp-on Idle
Configurable DSS Buttons

Direct Dial without Off Hook (Hands Free)

Directed Call Pickup

Display Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

Display Dialed Number and Name

Display Dynamic Call Divert Information

Display Select Hold Display

Display Time/Date Function

Do Not Disturb (DND)

DSS/BLF

Elapsed Time Display

Group Call Pickup

Hands Free

Hands-Free Announce and Reply (Idle State)

Last Number Redial

Login and Logout

Message Waiting Indication

Multi Appearance (Call Waiting)

Multiple Line Appearance

On-Hook Dialing

Placing Multiple Calls on Hold

Privacy – ANI Restriction

Reminder/wake up Call

Restrictions – Station

System Non-Exclusive Hold

 Transfer with Consultation

Transfer without Consultation (Blind)

Voice Page

Emergency Preemption

Listen to Paging while in a call (Busy Condition)

ULA - User Line Appearance (ULA)

2 Emergency communication

The Emergency communication resource should be from the same telephony server and have
the facility to automatic dial out to connect up to 300 participants in a single conference. System
should also have 120 party managed meet me conference. It should be possible to further divide
100 party conference bridge into any combination like 10 X 10 party, 5 x 20 party etc. if
required. The meet me conference should be secured means to enter to the conference bridge,
the user should enter the password.

The emergency communication management should be from Web Browser/HTML5 based

GUI based interface from Windows PC and Touchscreen Devices.

The emergency communication must be controlled by a user defined as Group Operator from
the web based GUI.

The Group Operator should have following features as below:

1. The Group Operator must be able to add / remove members

2. The Group Operator must be able to add other conference members

3. The Group Operator must be able to mute / unmute (User, None, All)

4. The Group Operator must be able to lock / unlock the conference

5. The Group Operator must be able to close the conference

6. It must be possible to dial out a pre-defined group (or multi-groups) of

participants/numbers by simply pressing the pre-assigned virtual key on PC.

7. Each pre-set conference must have its own unique dial number such that when this
group number is dialled; all the number stations will ring simultaneously.

8. Any combination of stations and external numbers must be able to be defined as

members of the Group Call.
 9. Participants may join a conference in the audible or in the mute mode, if in mute
mode, the right to speak must be selectively offered to attendees per their request by a special
signal sent to the Group Operator by the attendees.

10. Attendees must be able to be added or excluded at any time by the Group
Operator

11. The conference must be terminated when the Group Operator leaves (auto
terminate if all members left are muted).

12. The Group Operator must be able to barge into an existing user call based on
pre-emption predefined rules.

13. Group operator must have two SIP phones so that if one phone is busy in conference,
the second phone can be used to add participants.

14. Both group operator SIP phones should be controlled by web based conference
management GUI for telephony feature like answer, hold, transfer etc.

15. The same Group operator should also function as operator console

3 Specification of Type -1 IP phone

SIP phone should be from the same OEM of IP telephony system

132 x 64-pixel graphical LCD

1 VoIP accounts

XML remote phonebook

Auto provision via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS for mass deployment

Anonymous call, anonymous call rejection

PoE, Headset, Wall-Mountable

Volume adjustment, ring tone selection

Voicemail, MWI

Call park, call pickup

DTMF: In-band, out-of-band (RFC 2833) and SIP INFO

VAD, CNG, AEC, PLC, AJB, AGC

 Full-duplex hands-free speakerphone

SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)

NAT Traversal: STUN mode or 3rd party SBC

DTMF: In-Band, RFC2833, SIP Info

IP Assignment: Static/DHCP/PPPoE

1xRJ9 handset port

1xRJ9 headset port

Transport Layer Security (TLS)

LED for call and message waiting indication

2xRJ45 10/100M Ethernet ports

Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

4 Specification of Type -2 IP phone

SIP phone should be from the same OEM of IP telephony system

132 x 64 -pixel graphical LCD with backlight

2 VoIP accounts

Local phonebook up to 100 entries

Auto provision via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS for mass deployment

SRTP/ HTTPS/ TLS, 802.1x

PoE, Headset, Wall-Mountable

Volume adjustment, ring tone selection

Voicemail, MWI

Call park, call pickup

Narrowband codec: G.711, G.723.1, G.726, G.729AB

VAD, CNG, AEC, PLC, AJB, AGC

 Full-duplex hands-free speakerphone

SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)

NAT Traversal: STUN mode or 3rd party SBC

DTMF: In-Band, RFC2833, SIP Info

IP Assignment: Static/DHCP/PPPoE

1xRJ9 handset port

1xRJ9 headset port

Transport Layer Security (TLS)

LED for call and message waiting indication

2xRJ45 10/100M Ethernet ports

Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

5 Help desk specification

1.1 General capabilities

1.1.1 The proposed solution must be embedded within the platform, not installed
on a separate server and should be from the same OEM of the telephony system.

1.1.2 The system must be an All in one solution that provides a one server
solution for UC&C and 5 agent license for help desk.

1.1.3 Single server deployment with intuitive and central management capabilities
should support true multimedia.

1.1.4 Help desk managers must be able to easily prioritize customers and
incoming contacts regardless of the media used.

1.1.5 The same set of business and routing rules can be applied to voice / chat calls,
emails, and faxes if required.

1.1.6 The help desk must support multi-layer routing including Priority, Skill Based,
Statistical, Business Rules, and Customer Defined Values.

1.1.7 Help desk must have embedded IVR, enabling managers to design routing
plans and accurately assess help desk activity trends.
1.1.8 The IVR application must be a GUI application that can be managed by the
customer.

1.1.9 The customer must have the ability to build new self-services applications like
new IVR flow for new service.

1.1.10 Customer must have the ability to define/change routing rules by himself based
on customer's profile.

1.1.11 The help desk must support Outbound, Call-back and Campaigns – including
preview, progressive and automated outbound dialling.

1.1.12 The supervisor must be able to see the status of help desk agents in real-time in
his PC like logout, busy, free, release, non ACD etc. in graphical form in pie chart / bar chart.

1.2 Help desk facilities

1.2.1 Real-time Monitoring – must provide supervisors with statistical information

about the current status of the help desk with on line refresh (1sec). The application must
include pre-defined list of reports and the customer (end user) should be able to choose reports
as needed.

1.2.2 The Real Time application must provide the ability to build/change the
workspace for each user and by user (not vendor or distributor).

1.2.3 The RT must provide the ability to move agents to/from different
groups/queues for current login only.

1.2.4 Historical Reports – must be able to collect all information from call entry to
call termination. Call profile details for internal investigation purposes should be part of the
contact center solution.

1.2.5 The help desk solution must have an embedded Management Information
System (MIS) suite that monitors all help desk activities, generating reports that summarize
the past performance of the system over a given time period, and providing statistical analysis
of the help desk within a specified period. Real-time and historical reports provide:

Help desk agent should be able to do following activities from agent application installed on PC:

Login/Logout from group

Release/Resume

Ready

Wrap-up Code

Release for Break

 Release for Meeting

Control Wrap Up

Supervisor Help

Agent Board

Answer

Hold

Retrieve

Hang Up

6 Specifications for Self Survivable Gateway:

Gateway should have minimum 96 analog/CO ports. Gateway should be from the same OEM
of IP telephony system

Voice Processing – voice codecs: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1,etc. and echo cancellation: G.168 with
64ms echo tail; dynamic jitter buffer; voice activity detector (VAD)

Call Handling – configurable dialing plan

Fax Processing – T.30, T.38 fax relay

User Features – caller ID, call forward, call transfer, hotline, CRBT, do not disturb, speed dialing

Protocol – SIP (RFC3261, MGCP etc )

Standards – caller ID detection (FSK)

Primary and Backup – the gateway can be configured and controlled in server clusters

LED indicators– power, system status, network status, line status

Ethernet Connector – Dual Gigabit ethernet. The Gateway should function as a Self-Survivable
unit when the Ethernet connectivity at gateway end breaks.

Power Input – -48 VDC, should have dual DC power supply or dual AC power supply

Operation Humidity – 10% to 90% (non-condensing)

 Operation Temperature – 0 to 40ºC

7 PRI Gateway specification

PRI gateway should have Configuration – 1 PRI (30 Channels) or 2 PRI (60 Channels) and
should be from the same OEM of telephony system.

Voice Processing – G.711, G.729A, G.723.1, GSM, iLBC;echo cancellation: G.168 with 64ms echo
tail; dynamic jitter buffer; VAD and CNG

Calling Control – called/calling party number translation;second stage dialing; voice detection;
auto dialing with DTMF; ring back tone generation and detection; voice announcement

Voice Proxy – RTP voice proxy function for NAT/firewall traversal

Fax Relay – T.30 transparent mode, T.38 fax relay

Call Handling – configurable dialing plan, up to 500 routing rules

Configuration Interface – Web Utility

Remote Management – Telnet, HTTP, TR069

PSTN – ISDN PRI standard: ANSI, NI-2, DMS, 5ESS

SIP – RFC3261, RFC2976, RFC3515, RFC3581

DTMF – tone detection generation and detection; DTMF relay: RFC2833, INFO (SIP)

DTMF detection and progress tone detection

Play ring-back tone

T.30 and T.38

RTP proxy for NAT traversal

Ethernet – RJ-45, 10/100 Base-T

Trunking Interface – RJ-45

System Memory – 128MB or higher

System Flash – 16MB or higher

Power Input – 220V AC or - 48 VDC , should have dual AC/DC power supply
 Operation Humidity – 10% to 90% (non-condensing)

Operation Temperature – 0 to 40ºC

8 Specification of Soft client

The soft client should be from the same OEM of IP telephony system. Wifi facility for smart
phone to be provided by the customer.

Soft client should be available for Windows PC, Android Phone and IOS phone

It should support Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10

it should be freely downlodable from Google Play / Apple store

it should support following features:

Make a call

Hold

Retrieve

transfer

"Presences (User Select) -

Change status: Available, Busy No Answer, Busy call waiting, DND, Logoff, Forward to VM "

Dial users number - Internal, External, Mobile

"Instant messaging - IM with another soft client User, IM with a Multi Destination, Search on IM
sessions, Save IM sessions, IM to groups"

3 way audio conference

call divert

camp on

view missed call

Contacts synchronized with the PBX directory

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DATA AND WI-FI SYSTEM

Technical Specification of Core Switch

Sl. No. Description Parameters (24 Port switch) Compliance

(Yes/No)

1 General Features for switch

1.1 Form Factor 19 Inch Rack mountable Ethernet switch.

Non-Blocking architecture. Must have EAL3 /NDcPP or above

1.2 Architecture
common criteria certification.

All Functionalities of Switch shall be IPv6 compliant and it should

1.3 IPV6 Compliance
work on IPv6 Platform without any additional hardware/ software.

OEM End-of-sale declaration shall not have been released for the
1.4 End of sale
quoted model at the time of the bid submission.

The switch shall be supplied with the latest OS version and all the
1.5 Latest OS version
proposed switch should be of same IOS.

All the specified features/parameters/certifications must be

available on the Technical Bid opening date. Features /parameters
1.6 Feature Availability
/certifications proposed to be available in near future / on roadmap
shall not be considered.

Basic Layer-3 Switches must be managed Basic layer-3 type for better broadcast
1.7
Support segmentation.

Interface
1.8 Non-blocking architecture
Specifications:

Min 24 x 10 G Based SFP+ port , Min 1 x QSFP+ port , 2x Stacking

1.9 Ports port comprising 400 Gbps of stacking bandwidth from day 1 ,Min
2xQSFP28 Port from day1

All the Transceivers/Modules used to connect the Switches should

1.10 SFP Transceivers
be from the same OEM/make of the switches only

1.12 Port status display Each port must have a dedicated LED for status display.

Hardware Specifications:
2

Back Plane
2.1 At least 850 Gbps switching bandwidth
Bandwidth

2.2 Packet throughput 400 Mpps or more for each member switch.
 MAC Addresses and
2.3 270 K or more,
MTBF

VLANs (802.1q
2.4 4000 or more Concurrent
tagged VLAN)

Standards and Protocols

3

IEEE 802.1d Spanning tree protocol

802.1s MSTP (Multiple instances of STP)

3.1 L2 Loop Protection
802.1w RSTP (Rapid spanning tree), ), Should support less than 50
Millisecond convergence .

3.2 Link Aggregation 802.3ad Link Aggregation

3.3 QOS Support At least 8 nos of 802.1p Priority Queues per port.

3.4 IP Multicast IGMP Snooping

Port Mirroring /
3.4 Port mirroring must be available.
Span port

Routing Features
4

The switch shall have hardware based forwarding for IPv4 & IPv6.
Following protocols shall be supported with IPV4: Static routing,
PBR, RIPv2, OSPFv2
4.1 Routing Protocols:
IPV6: PBR, Static routing, RIPng, OSPFv3
The switch shall have Dual stack mode to run both IPv4 & IPv6
RIP and RIPng ready from day [Link],SyNCE,[Link],ETS

4.2 Router redundancy Shall support VRRP for IPV4 and IPV6.

4.3 Security Features

4.4 Network Login MAC and 802.1 X based Login must be available

4.5 Port Security MAC Address based Lockdown and Limited Learning

L2/L3/L4 IP based, Source port, destination port, MAC based, Time

4.6 Access Control Lists:
based

AAA AAA using RADIUS must be available

4.7 (authentication,
authorization and
 accounting)

Management and Monitoring:

5.

Following in-band management methods shall be available:

5.1 Management Secure Web based management (On https)

SSH based management (SSH v2).

Following out-of-band management methods shall be available:

Out-of-band
5.2 Serial console port
management
Management ethernet port .Dedicated OOB port

The switch shall support multiple administrator accounts. Each

Role based
5.3 administrator account shall be configurable with the desired level of
Administration
management privileges.

RMON Support
5.4 Remote Monitoring RFC 5357 for measuring round-trip performance between two
devices

Network The switch should support SNMP V2c and V3, XML api and SDN with
5.5
Management Openflow

5.6 Log Management Syslog shall be supported with multiple syslog destinations.

5.7 Flow export Shall support Netflow/IPFIX/sflow for flow exports.

Time Time synchronization using Network time protocol must be

5.8
synchronization available.

The switch shall have feature of backing up the configuration &

Configuration
5.9 restoring a backed- up configuration. Multiple Configuration files
backup & restore
must be supported.

TFTP/FTP upload Config/image upload and download from TFTP/FTP server shall be
5.10
and download available.

Other Requirements:
6.

Console cable and power cable (As per Indian standards) to be

Interface cables and
6.1 provided. All Cables shall be factory-terminated. The Switch
other features Operating System (OS) should mandatorily support individual
process (eg ssh , snmp, telnet, dhcp etc) restart to prevent reboot in
 case of Software Process Crash by running processes on top of
Kernel.

Should support AVB to ensure set of standards that provide the means
for highly reliable delivery of low-latency, time-synchronized AV
streaming services through Layer 2 Ethernet networks

Power Supply & Each switch should be populated with 1 PSU, should have option for
6.2
FAN RPS.

The switch shall conform to

6.3 Safety certification IEC-60950/CSA-60950/EN-60950/UL-60950 standard for safety
requirements of information technology [Link],CE

The offered equipment must be able to operate in the following

environmental conditions
Environmental
6.4
conditions ¨ Operating temperature: 0°C to 45°C

¨ Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% Non-condensing

Technical Specification of Access Switch- 48 Port

Sl. No. Description Parameters (48 Port Switch) Compliance

(Yes/No)

1.1 Form Factor 19 Inch Rack mountable Ethernet switch.

Non-Blocking architecture. Must have EAL3 /NDcPP or above

1.2 Architecture
common criteria certification.

All Functionalities of Switch shall be IPv6 compliant and it should

1.3 IPV6 Compliance
work on IPv6 Platform without any additional hardware/ software.

OEM End-of-sale declaration shall not have been released for the
1.4 End of sale
quoted model at the time of the bid submission.

The switch shall be supplied with the latest OS version and all the
1.5 Latest OS version
proposed switch should be of same IOS.

All the specified features/parameters/certifications must be

available on the Technical Bid opening date. Features /parameters
1.6 Feature Availability
/certifications proposed to be available in near future / on roadmap
shall not be considered.

1.7 Basic Layer-3 Switches must be managed Basic layer-3 type for better broadcast
 Support segmentation.

Interface
1.8 Non-blocking architecture
Specifications:

Should support at least 48 x10/100/1000T port with min 8

x100/1000SFP ports. Min 2x SFP+(10) port scalable . Min 4 Stacking
port should be ready from day 1 (40 Gbps stacking bandwidth) .
1.9 Ports Geographically stacking should be achieved if required for ease of
management. Min 2x 10 G Copper port support . Min 740 PoE/PoE+
buwer budget based on IEEE 802.3af/IEEE 802.3at, Min 1GB RAM &
4GB [Link] adustable fan based on temperture variation.

All the Transceivers/Modules used to connect the Switches should be

1.10 SFP Transceivers
from the same OEM/make of the switches only

1.12 Port status display Each port must have a dedicated LED for status display.

Hardware Specifications:
2

Back Plane
2.1 At least 176Gbps switching bandwidth
Bandwidth

2.2 Packet throughput 130 Mpps or more for each member switch.

MAC Addresses and

2.3 16 K or more,
MTBF

VLANs (802.1q
2.4 4000 or more Concurrent
tagged VLAN)

Standards and Protocols

3

IEEE 802.1d Spanning tree protocol

802.1s MSTP (Multiple instances of STP)

3.1 L2 Loop Protection
802.1w RSTP (Rapid spanning tree), ), Should support less than 50
Millisecond convergence .

3.2 Link Aggregation 802.3ad Link Aggregation

3.3 QOS Support At least 8 nos of 802.1p Priority Queues per port.

3.4 IP Multicast IGMP Snooping

3.4 Port mirroring must be available.

Port Mirroring /
 Span port

Routing Features
4

The switch shall have hardware based forwarding for IPv4 & IPv6.
Following protocols shall be supported with IPV4: Static routing, PBR,
RIPv2, OSPFv2
4.1 Routing Protocols:
IPV6: PBR, Static routing, RIPng, OSPFv3
The switch shall have Dual stack mode to run both IPv4 & IPv6
RIP and RIPng ready from day 1.

4.2 Router redundancy Shall support VRRP for IPV4 and IPV6.

4.3 Security Features

4.4 Network Login MAC and 802.1 X based Login must be available

4.5 Port Security MAC Address based Lockdown and Limited Learning

L2/L3/L4 IP based, Source port, destination port, MAC based, Time

4.6 Access Control Lists:
based

AAA
AAA using RADIUS must be available
(authentication,
4.7
authorization and
accounting)

Management and Monitoring:

5.

Following in-band management methods shall be available:

5.1 Management Secure Web based management (On https)

SSH based management (SSH v2).

Following out-of-band management methods shall be available:

Out-of-band
5.2 Serial console port
management
Management ethernet port .Dedicated OOB port

The switch shall support multiple administrator accounts. Each

Role based
5.3 administrator account shall be configurable with the desired level of
Administration
management privileges.

RMON Support
5.4 Remote Monitoring
RFC 5357 for measuring round-trip performance between two
 devices

Network The switch should support SNMP V2c and V3, XML api and SDN with
5.5
Management Openflow

5.6 Log Management Syslog shall be supported with multiple syslog destinations.

5.7 Flow export Shall support Netflow/IPFIX/sflow for flow exports.

Time
5.8 Time synchronization using Network time protocol must be available.
synchronization

The switch shall have feature of backing up the configuration &

Configuration
5.9 restoring a backed- up configuration. Multiple Configuration files
backup & restore
must be supported.

TFTP/FTP upload Config/image upload and download from TFTP/FTP server shall be
5.10
and download available.

Other Requirements:
6.

Console cable and power cable (As per Indian standards) to be

provided. All Cables shall be factory-terminated. The Switch
Operating System (OS) should mandatorily support individual
process (eg ssh , snmp, telnet, dhcp etc) restart to prevent reboot in
Interface cables and case of Software Process Crash by running processes on top of
6.1
other features Kernel.

Should support AVB to ensure set of standards that provide the means
for highly reliable delivery of low-latency, time-synchronized AV
streaming services through Layer 2 Ethernet networks

Power Supply & Each switch should be populated with 1 PSU, should have option for
6.2
FAN RPS.

The switch shall conform to

6.3 Safety certification IEC-60950/CSA-60950/EN-60950/UL-60950 standard for safety
requirements of information technology equipment.

The offered equipment must be able to operate in the following

environmental conditions
Environmental
6.4
conditions ¨ Operating temperature: 0°C to 50°C

¨ Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% Non-condensing

Electromagnetic
6.5 The Offered equipment shall have FCC certification.
interference
Technical Specification of Access Switch- 24 Port

Sl. No. Description Parameters (24 Port Switch) Compliance

(Yes/No)

1.1 Form Factor 19 Inch Rack mountable Ethernet switch.

Non-Blocking architecture. Must have EAL3 /NDcPP or above

1.2 Architecture
common criteria certification.

All Functionalities of Switch shall be IPv6 compliant and it should

1.3 IPV6 Compliance
work on IPv6 Platform without any additional hardware/ software.

OEM End-of-sale declaration shall not have been released for the
1.4 End of sale
quoted model at the time of the bid submission.

The switch shall be supplied with the latest OS version and all the
1.5 Latest OS version
proposed switch should be of same IOS.

All the specified features/parameters/certifications must be available

on the Technical Bid opening date. Features /parameters
1.6 Feature Availability
/certifications proposed to be available in near future / on roadmap
shall not be considered.

Basic Layer-3 Switches must be managed Basic layer-3 type for better broadcast
1.7
Support segmentation.

Interface
1.8 Non-blocking architecture
Specifications:

Should support at least 24 x10/100/1000T port with min 8

x100/1000SFP ports. Min 2x SFP+(10) port scalable. . Min 4 Stacking
port should be ready from day 1 (40 Gbps stacking bandwidth).
1.9 Ports Geographically stacking should be achieved if required for ease of
management. Min 370 Watt PoE/PoE+ power budget based on IEEE
802.3af/IEEE 802.3at,RPS Support, Min 1GB RAM & 4GB [Link]
adustable fan based on temperture variation.

All the Transceivers/Modules used to connect the Switches should be

1.10 SFP Transceivers
from the same OEM/make of the switches only

1.12 Port status display Each port must have a dedicated LED for status display.

Hardware Specifications:
2
 Back Plane
2.1 At least 128Gbps switching bandwidth
Bandwidth

2.2 Packet throughput 95 Mpps or more for each member switch.

MAC Addresses and

2.3 16 K or more,
MTBF

VLANs (802.1q
2.4 4000 or more Concurrent
tagged VLAN)

Standards and Protocols

3

IEEE 802.1d Spanning tree protocol

802.1s MSTP (Multiple instances of STP)

3.1 L2 Loop Protection
802.1w RSTP (Rapid spanning tree), ), Should support less than 50
Millisecond convergence .

3.2 Link Aggregation 802.3ad Link Aggregation

3.3 QOS Support At least 8 nos of 802.1p Priority Queues per port.

3.4 IP Multicast IGMP Snooping

Port Mirroring /
3.4 Port mirroring must be available.
Span port

Routing Features
4

The switch shall have hardware based forwarding for IPv4 & IPv6.
Following protocols shall be supported with IPV4: Static routing, PBR,
RIPv2, OSPFv2
4.1 Routing Protocols:
IPV6: PBR, Static routing, RIPng, OSPFv3
The switch shall have Dual stack mode to run both IPv4 & IPv6
RIP and RIPng ready from day 1.

4.2 Router redundancy Shall support VRRP for IPV4 and IPV6.

4.3 Security Features

4.4 Network Login MAC and 802.1 X based Login must be available

4.5 Port Security MAC Address based Lockdown and Limited Learning

4.6 Access Control Lists:

L2/L3/L4 IP based, Source port, destination port, MAC based, Time
 based

AAA
AAA using RADIUS must be available
(authentication,
4.7
authorization and
accounting)

Management and Monitoring:

5.

Following in-band management methods shall be available:

5.1 Management Secure Web based management (On https)

SSH based management (SSH v2).

Following out-of-band management methods shall be available:

Out-of-band
5.2 Serial console port
management
Management ethernet port .Dedicated OOB port

The switch shall support multiple administrator accounts. Each

Role based
5.3 administrator account shall be configurable with the desired level of
Administration
management privileges.

RMON Support
5.4 Remote Monitoring RFC 5357 for measuring round-trip performance between two
devices

Network The switch should support SNMP V2c and V3, XML api and SDN with
5.5
Management Openflow

5.6 Log Management Syslog shall be supported with multiple syslog destinations.

5.7 Flow export Shall support Netflow/IPFIX/sflow for flow exports.

Time
5.8 Time synchronization using Network time protocol must be available.
synchronization

The switch shall have feature of backing up the configuration &

Configuration
5.9 restoring a backed- up configuration. Multiple Configuration files
backup & restore
must be supported.

TFTP/FTP upload Config/image upload and download from TFTP/FTP server shall be
5.10
and download available.

6. Other Requirements:
 Console cable and power cable (As per Indian standards) to be
provided. All Cables shall be factory-terminated. The Switch
Operating System (OS) should mandatorily support individual
process (eg ssh , snmp, telnet, dhcp etc) restart to prevent reboot in
Interface cables and case of Software Process Crash by running processes on top of
6.1
other features Kernel.

Should support AVB to ensure set of standards that provide the means
for highly reliable delivery of low-latency, time-synchronized AV
streaming services through Layer 2 Ethernet networks

Power Supply & Each switch should be populated with 1 PSU, should have option for
6.2
FAN RPS.

The switch shall conform to

6.3 Safety certification IEC-60950/CSA-60950/EN-60950/UL-60950 standard for safety
requirements of information technology equipment.

The offered equipment must be able to operate in the following

environmental conditions
Environmental
6.4
conditions ¨ Operating temperature: 0°C to 50°C

¨ Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% Non-condensing

Electromagnetic
6.5 The Offered equipment shall have FCC certification.
interference

Technical Specification of ITAM

[Link] Specifications Compliance

1 Web Appliance Hardware Rack based Intel Core i7 or better, 3.20GHz w/ HD Graphics

Memory 32GB 4x8GB DDR4 2666MHz

Minimum 1 TB SATA/SSD Drive

Integrated NIC

COTS Compliant

2 Web Appliance Software

Items Capture specifications, warranties, Serial Numbers, MAC

Addresses, IP info, what other H/W relates/connects to this H/W,
 item status, event logs, assignees

Software Specifications, License information

Where each software is installed, license qty, component

Assignment and Relationships
relations, contract relations to software/hardware/invoices

Purchase proofs depicting date, vendor, prices, attached

Commercial Data
documents

Vendors, H/W & S/W Manufacturers, Buyers (for different Dpt),

Agents
Contractors

Location of each asset building, floor, room, rack, rack row, row
Locations
depth

Define custom contract types, like support& maintenance, SLA,

Contracts
etc. Track contract events.

Multiple tags for items and software. You may use tags for
Tags
grouping according to usage, budget, owner, importance, etc.

Attach documents to every main object entity (Items, Software,

Files
Invoices, Contracts)

Users Who has what or who is responsible for what.

Display rack layout with items assigned to each rack row.

Racks
(supports multiple items/rackrow).

Print label stickers for tag all your assets, with or without barcode,
Print labels from phones and laptops to cooling units and UPS. Easily define
new label paper layouts through the GUI.

Backup Get a full backup of the installation and data. Ability to restore

All screen pages/lists/reports print-outs possible without menus,

PagePrint Support
scrollbars and other clutter.

Interface Translations Translation file support

LDAP support Pull userlist for item assignment from an LDAP URL

ITAM Appliance Approved Make: Nexxus/ Siemens/ Torque

Technical Specification of Indore Access Point

[Link] Specification Compliance

1 Specification

1.1 Access Points proposed must include radios for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz with 802.11ac

1.2 The access point should be light weight and should support installations above drop ceiling,
under ceiling or on wall

1.3 No additional hardware should be required to mount the access point

1.4 LED should be available for activity indication

1.6 Must have 1x IEEE 802.3 Gigabit Ethernet

auto-sensing

1.7 The access point must have integrated antenna

2 802.11 ac features

2.1 Must support 2x2 multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO)

2.2 Should have dual Radios and should support 256 QAM

2.3 Should support 1.9 Gbps data rates on dual concurrent radio
operations

2.4 Should support 20,40 and 80 MHz Channels

2.5 Should support Maximal Ratio Combining

4 Networking features

4.1 The access point or the controller should be capable of running a local DHCP Server

4.2 Access points must support a "controllerless" mode where one AP will provide full RF and
network management.

4.3 Access points must provide automatic redundancy in case a site controller fails

4.4 The access point should support captive portal and local data base for authentication

4.5 Must have an dynamic or smart RF management features which allows WLAN to
automatically and intelligently adapt to changes in the RF environment

4.6 WLAN Solution should support Mesh capabilities

5 Roaming Features

5.1 Along with a controller the Access Points should support fast roaming feature
 5.2 Security features

5.3 The WLAN solution should have comprehensive integrated security features that include layer
2-7 stateful packet filtering firewall , NAT

5.4 The access point should provide wireless IPS sensor support on both radios.

6 The WLAN Solution should support IP filtering and NAT

6.1 WLAN solution must support Application Visibility Control (Deep Packet Inspection)at both
Controller and AP level

6.2 WLAN solution must support personal and enterprise WPA2 authentication for a staff WLAN
concurrent with open access public WLAN

7 Security solution must provide Rogue AP detection by comparing the MAC address
forwarding tables in common enterprise class Ethernet LAN switches

7.1 RogueDetection: 24x7 dual-band WIPS sensing and on-board IDS

7.2 Secure guest access (hotspot)with captive portal, IPSec and RADIUS Server

8 Management Features

8.1 WLAN solution should provide features that provides no touch AP discovery, adoption,
provisioning

8.2 WLAN solution should provide features that provides other management functions including
firmware push and statistics

8.3 Access points must support autonomous mode

8.4 Must support telnet and/or SSH login to APs directly for troubleshooting flexibility

10.1 Power

11 Integrated PoE Support

11.1 QOS Support

11.2 The Access Points should support WMM,WMM-UAPSD,802.1p,Diffserv and TOS

11.3 Support for Voice-over-wireless LAN (VoWLAN) quality of service (QoS) ensures toll quality,
even with many simultaneous calls on a single access point.

11.4 Access point should support 802.11 DFS

Solution requirements

12.1 The AP should be capable of working as a virtual controller for location where the number of
AP's is less than 64
 12.2 AP's configured as Virtual Controller should also perform the function of an AP.

13.3 Access points must provide automatic redundancy in case a site controller fails

Certification

13.1 Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA) certified 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac

13.2 Access points must have WiFi Alliance certification for WPA2 Enterprise

Technical Specification of Wireless Controller (Wi-Fi Controller)

[Link] specification Compliance

1 OEM Proposed Solution Controller & AP should be of the same OEM.

WLAN Controller should be Hardware appliance 1U Rack

2 Architecture
mountable

3 Interfaces It should have 4x1000Base-T interfaces.

Controller shall be capable of supporting 500 AP’s with license

4 Scalability
upgradeability. Min 120 AP license should be ready from day 1.

Should support e dual-band capable clients to the 5 GHz band

on dual-band access points.

Should balance wireless clients across APs on different

channels, based upon the client load on the APs.
5 WLAN Features
Should support internal DHCP server.

WLAN Solution Layer 3 roaming and mobility that allows a

client to roam between APs on the same network but different
client subnets, while preserving its IP address and existing data
sessions.

Unified access, policy, configuration, and management for

thousands of devices
Simple Central
6
Management Web-based administration with HTML5-

enhanced graphical user interface

 User group policies can be applied network wide or to
individual devices and enforced consistently across both
wireless and wired networks

Powerful policy template feature enables updates to groups of

APs, branch routers, and switches with a few clicks

Simple centralized firmware upgrades with distributed

download functionality to decrease WAN utlilzation &
download time

Staged configuration and auto-provisioned image updates

ensure devices are updated

WLAN Controller shall have inbuilt capability to inspect all

traffic from each user session and allow or deny any traffic that
does not satisfy specified policies.

7 Network Policy features

WLAN controller shall provide identity-based controls to
enforce application-layer security and prioritization.

WLAN solution shall be capable of controlling bandwidth per

user, per VLAN/SSID etc.

Network maps with integrated aerial views and automatic floor

planning enable easy visualization of topology and status

Real-time heat-maps show RF propagation within a network

State-of-the-art Planning Tool with aerial maps, multi-floor

RF Planning and
8 auto-placement, coverage maps, and options to clone buildings
Visualization
and floors

Built-in client and rogue location detection and placement on

a floor plan

Spectrum analysis to detect and identify sources of Wi-Fi

interference

Should prevent students/users connecting to rogue AP and also

prevent an outside user trying to connect to campus WLAN.
9 WLAN Security
Should prevent Ad-hoc connections (i.e. clients forming a
network amongst themselves without an AP)
 Should prevent windows bridge (i.e. client that is associated to
AP is also connected to wired network and enabled bridging
between two interfaces)

Teacher View application included to monitor and redirect

student wireless clients during class time

Application Q0S and firewall with detailed user and device

context-based policies

10 Granular Control Configuration of cloud proxy to split Internet and corporate

VPN traffic with integration to Web sense SaaS

Configuration of L2 and L3 IPsec VPNs

Automatic and flexible IP address allocation and distribution

across entire remote branch network

Dashboard widgets organized into pre-defined or customizable

perspectives
11 Reporting/ Monitoring
Bandwidth network bandwidth control

Real-time monitoring of alarms and events

Operating temperature: 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)

Environmental
12 Storage temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C)
Specifications
Relative humidity: 5% - 95% (noncondensing)

13 OEM Criteria All the switches , Wireless controller , Access Points and the
fiber modules should be from the same OEM .The IOS for all the
switches should be on the same platform . The OEM should
have R&D center in India . The OEM should have atleast 2 RMA
depot in India and should have India Toll free number with
India TAC center - reflected on the official website . The OEM
should be present in Gartner in leader quadrant for wired and
wireless.

Technical Specification of Internet Web Security

[Link]. Specification / Requirement Compliance

A Sizing
1 The solution shall support minimum of 1000 users from day 1 with three-years subscription
license / support and should have flexibility to scale up to 5000 users in future with additional
software / subscription license. In case of hardware-based solution, scalability needs to be
provisioned from day 1 and should not require any additional hardware in future.

2 The proposed solution may have more than one solution but from same approved OEM to
cater the required services without any feature, scale, reliability and specification deviation.

B Deployment & Reliability

3 The solution must not have a single point of failure at each level from day 1 and should have
seamless failover transparently to secondary / alternate site (running with same full scale &
specified features) if primary site goes down.

4 The solution must have at least 99% service availability.

5 The solution shall support multiple traffic-forwarding/ingestion options as like Explicit proxy,
GRE & IPsec tunnel for traffic forwarding or inline mode deployment for on premise solutions.

C Reporting & Logging

6 The solution must provide a single pane of unified admin console / interface in case of
multi-locations environment (HQ, Branches and roaming users) configuring all services.

7 The solution should support immediate enforced policy changes applied in the unified admin
console for all applicable locations and services.

8 Any software upgrade should be seamless without interruption of services and must be
transparent for users and do not require service windows.

9 The solution shall have flexibility to define policy based on User, Group, Locations and time
schedule etc.

10 Time based policies should automatically be applied based on the time zones of the end users
connecting to the service. Duplication of rules to support multiple time zones should not be
required.

11 The solution provides a single integrated logging for all services.

12 The solution shall have the ability to integrate multiple sub-reports into a composite summary
report.

13 The solution shall have transaction log retention for all HTTP & HTTPS transactions. The
minimum retention window should be 6 months, with options to expand for longer duration.

14 The solution must have the ability to obfuscate user names to protect individual identity and
can be decrypted only in the presence of an auditor.
15 The solution shall allow for a role-based administrative model based on different departments.

16 The solution shall provide audit trail to keep track on the authorized changes made by users
and Administrators.

D Authentication

17 The solution shall support but not limited to: Active Directory (AD), SAML 2.0, Secure LDAP and
internal Database etc.

18 The solution must support direct AD/LDAP directory synchronization.

19 The solution must support authentication methods that are fully transparent to the user and
integrate with ID Federation systems

20 The solution must cache credentials for a user to minimize number of times a user go to the ID
Provider.

21 User identification and directory synchronization must be done only once and applied to all
engines including Malware detection for both inbound and outbound as well as Data Loss
Prevention etc.

E Web Security

22 The solution shall inspect every byte both inbound and outbound internet traffic each passing
through the proxy and performance shall not be degraded with full content inspection
including SSL inspection.

23 The solution must support root certificate for SSL decryption. In addition, it should have option
to support custom intermediate root certificate signed by customer organizations.

24 The solution shall have multiple Anti-Malware and Anti-Spyware engines to protect users
against websites containing malicious code or malware.

25 The solution should be able to categorize requested web pages in real-time using contextual
analysis.

26 The solution shall be capable of dynamically blocking a legitimate website which has become
infected and unblock the temporary site restriction when the threat has been removed.

27 The solution must detect and block botnets based on Signature in addition to blacklists and
Trojan malware communications from infected systems. System must log and provide detailed
information on the originating system sufficient to enable identification of infected units for
mitigation
28 The solution must provide zero day protections for Microsoft Patch Tuesday vulnerabilities
relation to Web & Internet traffic

29 The solution must detect and block known and unknown fraudulent / phishing application

30 The solution must provide granular control over instant messaging for example and instant
messenger allow chat but block file transfers.

31 The solution must be able to restrict or control bandwidth of streaming media as appropriate.

32 The solution must be capable of blocking traffic to specific regions / countries.

33 The solution shall support granular Web 2.0 filtering as like allow Gmail read-only access for
some users & others allow Gmail to send email but no attachments.

34 The solution shall be able to detect and block file types based on true file type not extension or
mime type for both inbound and outbound.

35 The solution must dynamically block content that may cause legal liability even if the site is not
pre-categorized.

36 The solution must support compressed files scanning.

37 The solution should be able to filter based on specific words in either the URL string and the
page content including source code.

38 The solution must be able to enforce search engine restriction filters such as Google, Yahoo,
Bing, Ask and YouTube etc to safe search options.

39 The solution must have a customizable block page and able to redirect requested sites to
specified sites.

40 The solution must inspect full SSL traffic across all ports and protocols.

41 The solution should be able identity & block 4 times zipped archive files.

42 The solution shall allow custom whitelist and blacklist definition.

43 The solution shall detect & protection against Cross Site Scripting attacks.

44 The solution must identify & block P2P clients and Anonymizers

45 The solution must be able to dynamically block the use of anonymous proxies in real-time.

46 The solution shall support identification and blocking of command & control communications.

F Next Generation Outbound Firewall

46 The solution should support Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) for application level policy controls
for outbound traffic.

47 The solution shall have flexibility to define policy based on User, Group and location and time
schedule.

48 The solution should support applications usage visibility per user basis.

49 The solution should support any amount of Office 365 traffic for considering scalable users
without impacting user experience, session, throughput limitations on Firewall.

50 The solution should support identical security posture across multi-locations, regardless of
users at each site and define IP and FQDN based destination policies.

51 The software upgrade should be seamless without interruption of services and must be
transparent for users and do not require service windows.

52 The solution should support integration with proxy to log and apply policies based on original
client source IP address instead of the proxy IP.

G Sandbox

53 The solution provides sandboxing for all users regardless whether they are on a corporate
network or public network.

54 The solution shall perform sandbox analysis (execution) of binaries to detect true Zero Day
attacks for SSL as well as non-SSL traffic.

55 The sandbox solution should be in-line.

56 The solution shall support signature less method to detect and block zero-day and APT
malware.

57 The solution will provide patient zero protection for Flash, Java, MS Office, dll, pdf, exe, ZIP and
RAR.

58 The solution must be able to quarantine first time request and users will be notified if a file
isn’t instantly available for download and being scanned in a sandbox

H Bandwidth Control

59 The solution must provide a mechanism for prioritizing bandwidth for business-critical web &
cloud applications (e.g. Salesforce, Outlook) over non-critical apps (e.g. Facebook).

60 The solution shall have flexibility to define policy based on minimum bandwidth, maximum
bandwidth, large downloads, time schedule, location and URL’s etc.

61 The solution shall provide bandwidth control for all locations (HQ, Branches) from a unified
 single management console

62 The solution should be capable of allowing policy creation based on:

· Specific IP/IP subnet

· Specific Location

· Access Time

· URL Accessed

· URL Category Accessed

· Cloud Application accessed

63 The solution should be capable of allowing policy based on percentages of overall bandwidth

64 The solution should perform bandwidth shaping based control to avoid packet drops for better
user experience

65 The solution should be capable of performing bandwidth throttling in Uplink and Downlink
direction

I Mobility

66 The solution shall support web mobile agent laptop (windows and mac) users.

67 The web mobile agent shall adaptively provide web security protection based on the changing
location of mobile users.

68 The solution shall capable to identify mobile user’s credential and affiliated group regardless of
changing location.

69 The web mobile agent shall not require manual user intervention, which would be annoying to
non-technical users.

70 The solution must report based on Mobile Device Application Category.

71 The solution must restrict a list of Mobile app-stores as defined by the administrator.

72 The solution must restrict and report on Mobile Applications: Leaking Personally Identifiable
information, Leaking Location information, Transmitting Device ID’s, with known
vulnerabilities, Exhibiting malicious activity

73 The solution shall notify end-users when Mobile Application traffic is blocked

J OEM Eligibility
 74 The OEM of the offered solution must feature in the Leaders segment of the Gartner Magic
Quadrant published in the last 3 consecutive years (2015, 2016 and 2017 or latest).

75 The OEM must have well established Research & Development / Engineering Centre in India.

76 The OEM must have Technical Assistance Centre (TAC) support in India.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IP CCTV Surveillance System

Technical Specification of 3MP Dome Camera

[Link] Features Specifications Compliance

1 Form Factor Dome

2 Image Sensor 1/2.8” CMOS or better

3 Day/ Night Operation Yes with IR Cut Filter

4 Minimum Illumination Color 0.04 lux ,B/W 0.002 lux

5 Lens 3 - 9 mm, P-Iris, Megapixel Lens with remote zoom and focus

6 Electronic Shutter 1 ~ 1/10,000 s

7 Image Resolution 3 MP or better

8 Compression H.265/H.264 , MJPEG

Frame Rate and H.265/H.264 3M (2048 X 1536) @25/30 fps , 2 MP (1920 X 1080 ) @
9 Resolution (Main 50/60 FPS
Stream)

Minimum 2 streams should be configurable at 1920 X 1080 @ 25 fps

10
Simultaneous Stream simultaneously

11 White Balance Auto / Manual / ATW / One Push

12 GOV Length It should be possible to vary the GOV length in the camera setting .

13 Noise Reduction Digital Noise Reduction 2D , 3D DNR , ColorNR

14 Zoom 3x optical Zoom or better, 10x Digital Zoom or better

15 Digital PTZ Camera should support digital PTZ

Quad Stream supportable , Each stream should be H.265/H.264

16
Video Streams configurable at different resolutions.

Video compression type ( H.265/H.264,MJPEG) and bit rate of each

17
Video quality view stream should be viewable at home screen on web browser

18 Image Setting Saturation, Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Hue adjustable

19 Two way audio Line in , Line Out

20 Audio Compression G.711 , G.726 , AAC , LPCM

21 Iris P iris

22 Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB or better

23 Ibuilt IR Upto 40 mtr IR distance

24 Alarm 1 x Input / 1 x output

Camera should have in-built Edge Bases Analytics, Abandoned

Edge Video Content Object, Intrusion Detection, Tampering, Wrong Direction, Loitering
25
Analytics Detection,
Object Counting, Stopped Vehicle, Object Removal

Camera should support network failure detection , Camera should

Storage backup on have the capability to start the recording automatically on SD card in
26
network failure case of connectivity between camera and NVR/Storage device goes
down

27 Edge Storage Built in SD card slot with support upto 128 GB SD card

28 Network Interface RJ-45, 10/100Mbps Ethernet

IPv4/v6, TCP/IP, UDP, RTP, RTSP, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, FTP, SMTP,
29
Protocols DHCP, PPPoE, UPnP, IGMP, SNMP, QoS, ONVIF

30 Text Overlay Date & time, and a customer-specific text etc

31 privacy masks Support upto 5 privacy masks

32 Security HTTPS , IP Filter , IEEE 802.1X

33 Firmware Upgrade The firmware upgrade shall be done though web interface,

34 Video Output 1 X BNC

 Audio Transmission
35
mode Full Duplex , Half Duplex , Simplex

36 Enclosure IP 66 weather proof ,

37 Vandal Resistant IK 10

38 Power POE / 12 V DC /24 V AC

39 Operating Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C

40 Operating Humidity Humidity 10%–90% No Condensation

41 Certification UL, CE, FCC

42 ONVIF ONVIF Profile S & G

43 User accounts 20

44 Supported Web Browser Internet Explorer (7.0+) / Firefox / Safari

Technical Specification of 3MP Bullet Camera

[Link] Feature Specifications Compliance

1 Form Factor Bullet

2 Image Sensor 1/2.8” CMOS or better

3 Day/ Night Operation Yes with IR Cut Filter

4 Minimum Illumination Color 0.1 lux B/W 0.01 lux

5 Lens 2.8 - 12 mm, P-Iris, Megapixel Lens with remote zoom and focus

6 Electronic Shutter 1 ~ 1/10,000 s

7 Image Resolution 3 MP or better

8 Compression H.265 ,H.264 , MJPEG

Frame Rate and H.265/H.264 3M (2048 X 1536) @25/30 fps , 2 MP (1920 X 1080 ) @
9 Resolution 50/60 FPS

Minumum 2 streams should be configurable at 1920 X 1080 @ 25 fps

10 Simultaneous Stream simultaneously
11 White Balance Auto / Manual / ATW / One Push

12 GOV Length It should be possible to vary the GOV length in the camera setting.

13 Field Of View 36 º to 106 º

14 Noise Reduction Digital Noise Reduction 2D , 3D DNR , Color Noise reduction

15 Zoom 4x optical Zoom or better , 10x Digital Zoom or better

16 Digital PTZ Camera should support digital PTZ

Quad Stream supportable , Each stream should be H.265 ,H.264

17 Video Streams configurable at different resolutions, frame rate and bit rate.

Video compression type ( H.265 ,H.264,MJPEG) and bit rate of each

18 Video quality view stream should be viewable at home screen on web browser

19 Image Setting Saturation, Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness,Hue adjustable

20 Two way audio Line in , Line Out

21 Audio Compression G.711 , G.726 , AAC , LPCM

22 Iris P iris

23 Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB or better

24 Inbuilt IR Upto 40 mtr IR distance

25 Alarm 2 x Input , 1 x output

Camera should have in-built Edge Based Analytics, Abandoned

Edge Video Content Object, Intrusion Detection,Tampering, Wrong Direction, Loitering
Analytics Detection,
26 Object Counting, Stopped Vehicle, Object Removal

Camera should support network failure detection , Camera should

Storage backup on have the capability to start the recording automatically on SD card in
network failure case of connectivity between camera and NVR/Storage device goes
27 down

28 Edge Storage Built in SD card slot with support upto 128 GB SD card

29 Network Interface RJ-45, 10/100Mbps Ethernet

IPv4/v6, TCP/IP, UDP, RTP, RTSP, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, FTP, SMTP,
30 Protocols DHCP, PPPoE, UPnP, IGMP, SNMP, QoS, ONVIF
 31 Text Overlay Date & time, and a customer-specific text etc

32 Security HTTPS , IP Filter , IEEE 802.1X

The firware upgrade shall be done though web interface, The

33 Firmware Upgrade firmware shall be available free of cost

34 Video Output 1 X BNC

Normal , Mirror , 90 deg clockwise , 90 deg anti clockwise , 180 deg

35 Image Rotation rotate

36 Privacy Masks Upto 5 privacy masks

Audio Transmission
37 mode Full Duplex , Half Duplex , Simplex

38 Enclosure IP 67 weather proof , IK 10

39 Power POE / 12 V DC /24 V AC

40 Max Power consumption Max power consumption should not exceed 14 W

40 Operating Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C

41 Operating Humidity Humidity 10%–90% No Condensation

42 Certification UL, CE, FCC, RoHS

43 ONVIF ONVIF Profile S and G

44 User accounts 20

45 Supported Web Browser Internet Explorer (7.0+) / Firefox / Safari

Technical Specification of 64 Channel NVR upgradable upto 128 Channel

[Link] Feature Specification Compliance

System CCTV Camera and NVR should be of same make

1 CPU Intel i7 core or better

2 RAM 2x4GB, DDR3 or better

3 Graphics Intel HD Graphics

4 IP Camera Input 64 CH upgradable to 128 CH

5 Operating System Embedded Linux OS

Video Management
6 System Pre-Installed with appropriate licenses

Recording / Playback

7 Throughput 640 Mbps

8 Decoding Upto 3840 PPS @ D1

9 Recording Mode Continuous, Schedule, Event Recording

10 PlayBack Mode Auto, Custom, Split Mode

Storage and I/O

11 Built-in SATA Interface 2.5” SATA x 1 (for OS) + 3.5” SATA x 8 (for storage)

12 RAID Hardware RAID 0/1/5/10

13 e-SATA 1 port

14 COM Port RS-232 x 1 + RS-485 x 1

15 Video Output HDMI / VGA

16 Audio Input 1 x Mic In

17 Audio Output 1 x Line Out

18 USB Port USB 3.0 x 2 + USB 2.0 x 3

19 Digital Input TTL-level x 8

20 Digital Output Relay NC/NO x2 (DC24V/1A)

Network

21 WAN Port 1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps

 22 LAN Port 1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps

23 SFP Combo Port 1 x 1 Gbps

Built-in PoE Switch

General

Operation
24 Temperature 0°C ~ 40°C

Operation Relative
25 Humidity 10% ~ 90% Non-condensing

VMS Specification

[Link] Features Specifications Compliance

Maximum Number of
1
Clients 1 admin / 5 users or more (concurrent) per NVR

2 Compression H.264 , H.265

3 Compatibility ONVIF profile S & G

Live view

An interface to define layouts and pre-set cameras in multiple view

4
View Manager mode

5 View Patrol Able to switch between different view pages and devices

An interface to modify display layout, position and the size of live view
6
Layout Manager of camera within layout

7
Digital Zoom Zoom in/ Zoom out digitally by mouse scroll wheel

8 Snapshot Instant snapshot upon mouse click

9 Event Notification
Alarm, Motion detection, Connection loss/ auto reconnect between
 VMS and NVR/camera

Bandwidth Live view with stream 1 in full screen mode or stream 2 in multi-view
10
Management screen mode (Bitrate adjustable)

Camera control, image setup, camera video format, IR/Exposure setup,

11
Camera Management Camera information

E-Map

Area maps with camera icons, small live view screen; alarm trigger,
12
Layout event trigger

Google map positioning; E-Map image upload; camera positioning;

13
Setup camera vision angle and direction

PTZ

14 Control Pan, tilt, zoom control; focus, exposure adjustment

15 Preset Points and Tours Support

16 Joytick USB based Joystick support

Device Management

17 Device Search Auto connect/ Auto scan / Manual add NVR or Camera

Model name, IP address, MAC address, type, protocol, streaming port,

18 Device Information
port, video snapshot

19 Search Filter IPCAM, NVR, DVR, VSS; ONVIF

Playback & Export

Search video recording by time, event, channel from multiple cameras/

20
Recording Search NVRs Instant view, snapshot and export

Continuous forward and backward with speed 1/4x, 1/2x, 1x, 2x, 4x;
21
Playback control pause
22 Synchronized Playback 32 CH(Local)/ 64 CH(Remote)

23 Snapshot Instant snapshot upon mouse click

24 Digital Zoom Zoom in/ Zoom out digitally by mouse scroll wheel

Export Video clips with AVI, RAW, MP4, MKV, MOV; digital signature
25
Video Export supported

Event Management

26 Event Source Multiple cameras/ NVRs

27 Event Trigger Video motion detection, Alarm, Video loss

Instantly Record video, audio notification, full screen pop-out with live
28
Event Response video, email notification

Smart search list for recorded videos by video motion detection/

29
Smart Search alarm/ video loss

System

Unlimited number of users, Active Directory, customized permissions

30 Permission for different user including covert cameras/ NVRs, device management,
Management playback & export

31 Language Multiple language support

Operation Log
32
Management Recorded list of user operation, IPCAM event, NVR event

33 System status Instant view of CPU usage, RAM, HDD valid space, Network status

Possibility to import or export setting packs for convenient VMS setting

34
Setting Import/ Export management

Remote Access

35 PC Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 11+ with 16CH display layout
Technical Specification of 24 Port Fabric (SFP) Switch

[Link] Features Specifications Compliance

20 Nos of 20 100M/1G SFP Port , 4 Nos of GbE RJ45/SFP Combo Port , 4

1 Port Configuration
Nos of 1G/10G SFP+ Port ,1 X Console port DB9

2 Switching Bandwidth 128Gbps

Forwarding
3 95.232 Mpps
Performance

4 MAC Address 32K

5 Jumbo Frames 10056 Bytes

6 Operating Temperature -20°C to 60°C

7 Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH

8 Storage Temperature -25°C to 70°C

9 Storage Humidity 10 to 90% RH

10 AC Input 100V-240V

11 DC Input 24V ~ 48V DC

12 Dual Input AC/DC

13 Certifications CE/FCC Class A

IEEE802.1D (STP)

14 Spanning Tree IEEE802.1W (RSTP)

IEEE802.1S (MSTP)

802.1Q VLAN

Port-Based

4K VLAN Entries
15 VLAN
Private VLAN

Voice VLAN

Guest VLAN
 Q-in-Q

802.1v Protocol VLAN

MAC-Based VLAN

IP Subnet-Based VLAN

Dynamic Trunk
16 IEEE 802.3ad LACP
Static Trunk

GARP/GVRP

IGMP Snooping
17 L2 Features
MLD Snooping

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)

Static Route
18 L3 Features
DHCP Server

Port Based

802.1p
19 Class of Service
DSCP

TCP/UDP Port

Ingress
20 Rate Limiting
Egress

WRR
Priority Queue
21
Scheduling
Strict Priority

22 Hardware Queues 8

L2/L3/L4
23 ACLs
IPv6 Support

Port Security (MAC-based)

24 Security
IP Source Guard
 Storm Control

RADIUS Authentication 802.1x

TACACS+ Authentication

HTTPs and SSL (Secured Web)

BPDU Guard

STP Root Guard

DHCP Snooping

Loop Protection

Client

Relay

25 DHCP Option 66

Option 67

Option 82

Syslog
26 Event/Error Log
SMTP (RFC821)

SNMP

Web
Management Access
27
Filtering
Telnet

SSH

28 SNMP (v1, v2c, v3)

29 RMON ( 1,2,3 & 9 Groups)

30 Software Upgrade

31 Configuration Export/Import

32 Port Mirroring

33 LLDP (IEEE802.1AB)
 34 LLDP-MED (IEEE802.1AB)

35 CDP Aware

36 sFlow

37 IPv6 Management

38 NTP

1588v2 PTP

OAM (IEEE802.3ah)

CFM (IEEE802.1ag)
39 Carrier Ethernet
PM (ITU-T Y.1731)

ELPS (ITU-T G.8031)

ERPS (ITU-T G.8032)

40 MGMT Port OOB MGMT Port

Technical Specification of 24 Port PoE Switch

[Link] Features Specifications Compliance

24 Nos of 10M/100M/1G RJ45 Port ,2 Nos of GbE
1 Port Configuration RJ45/SFP Combo Port , 1 Nos of RJ45 Console Port or
better
2 PoE Function IEEE802.3at (PoE+ 30W) ,IEEE802.3af (PoE 15.4W)
3 PoE Port 24

4 Available PoE Power 370W

5 Switching Bandwidth 52 Gbps

Forwarding
6 38.7Mpps
Performance
7 MAC Address 8K
8 Jumbo Frames 9216 Bytes
 IEEE802.1D (STP) , IEEE802.1W (RSTP) , IEEE802.1S
9 Spanning Tree
(MSTP)
802.1Q VLAN , Port-Based , Private VLAN , Voice
VLAN , Guest VLAN , Q-in-Q , 802.1v Protocol VLAN ,
10 VLAN MAC-Based VLAN , IP Subnet-Based VLAN
4K VLAN Entries

11 IEEE 802.3ad LACP Dynamic Trunk , Static Trunk

GARP/GVRP ,IGMP Snooping ,MLD Snooping ,

12
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
13 L3 Features Static Route , DHCP Server
14 Class of Service Port Based , 802.1p , DSCP ,TCP/UDP Port
15 Rate Limiting Ingress , Egress
Priority Queue
16 WRR , Strict Priority
Scheduling
17 Hardware Queues 8
18 ACLs L2/L3/L4 , IPv6 Support
Port Security (MAC-based) , IP Source Guard , Storm
Control , RADIUS Authentication 802.1x , TACACS+
19 Security Authentication , HTTPs and SSL (Secured Web) , BPDU
Guard , STP Root Guard ,DHCP Snooping ,Loop
Protection
20 DHCP Client , Relay , Option 66 , Option 67 , Option 82
21 Event/Error Log Syslog , SMTP (RFC821)
Management Access
22 SNMP , Web , Telnet , SSH
Filtering
23 PoE Management Scheduling , Auto-Checking , Power Delay
SNMP (v1, v2c, v3) , RMON ( 1,2,3 & 9 Groups) ,
24 Software Upgrade , Configuration Export/Import
,Port Mirroring
25 LLDP (IEEE802.1AB)
26 LLDP-MED (IEEE802.1AB)
27 CDP Aware
28 sFlow
29 IPv6 Management
30 NTP
Topology View , Floor View , Map View ,Dashboard ,
31 Device Management
Traffic Monitoring , Cable Diagnostics
Operating
32 Temperature & Temp : 0°C to 40°C , Humidity : 10 to 90% RH
Humidity

33 Storage Temperature -20 to 70°C

34 Storage Humidity 10 to 90% RH

35 AC Input 100V-240V
 EN61000-4-5 (for RJ45 Port, Surge 6KV) ,CE/FCC Class
36 Certifications
A

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL Compliance

1.1 DESCRIPTION

The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for
Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by
this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the
A. integrity of all conductors.

The facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system.

Digitally stored message sequences shall notify the building occupants that a
fire or life safety condition has been reported. Message generator(s) shall be
capable of automatically distributing up to eight (8) simultaneous, unique
messages to appropriate audio zones within the facility based on the type and
location of the initiating event. The Fire Command Center (FCC) shall also
support Emergency manual voice announcement capability for both system
wide or selected audio zones, and shall include provisions for the system
B. operator to override automatic messages system wide or in selected zones.

The system shall support additional, alternate Fire Command Centers, which
shall be capable of simultaneous monitoring of all system events. Alternate
Fire Command Centers shall also support an approved method of transferring
the control functions to an alternate Fire Command Center when necessary.
All Fire Command Centers shall be individually capable of assuming Audio
Command functions such as Emergency Paging, audio zone control functions,
C. and Firefighter's Telephone communication functions.

Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory
and trouble signals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated
D. personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex communication network.
1.2 SCOPE

A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire and gas detection

system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and
A. drawings.

B. Basic Performance:
 Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices
1 shall be encoded on NFPA Class A Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired NFPA Class A as part of an addressable
2 device connected by the SLC Circuit.
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired NFPA Class A as part of an
3 addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
On Class A configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating
4 power or the ability to report an alarm.
Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power
5 failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
Speaker circuits may be controlled by NAC outputs built into the amplifiers,
6 which shall function as addressable points on the Digital Audio Loop.
NAC speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one
7 speaker circuit per floor of the building or smoke zone which ever is greater.
Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised
8 for normal and abnormal conditions.
NAC speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of
any one (1) speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in
9 the system.
Two-way emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for
9.1 open and short circuit conditions.
Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker
9.2 circuit per smoke zone.
Speaker circuits shall be electrically supervised for open and short circuit
conditions. If a short circuit exists on a speaker circuit, it shall not be possible to
9.3 activate that circuit.
Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised
for abnormal conditions. Digital amplifiers shall provide built-in speaker
10 circuits, field configurable as four Class B, or two Class A circuits.
Digital amplifiers shall be capable of storing up to two minutes of digitally
recorded audio messages and tones. The digital amplifiers shall also be
capable of supervising the connection to the associated digital message
generator, and upon loss of that connection shall be capable of one of the
11 following system responses:

a. The digital amplifier shall automatically broadcast the stored audio message.
The digital amplifier shall switch to a mode where a local bus input on the
digital amplifier will accept an input to initiate a broadcast of the stored
message. This bus input shall be connected to a NAC on a local FACP for the
purpose of providing an alternate means of initiating an emergency message
b. during a communication fault condition.
Speaker circuits shall be either 25 VRMS or 70VRMS. Speaker circuits shall have
20% space capacity for future expansion or increased power output
c. requirements.
Two-way emergency telephone (Fire Fighter Telephone) communication shall
be supported between the Audio Command Center and up to thirty five (35)
d. remote Fire Fighter's Telephone locations simultaneously on a conference.
 Means shall be provided to connect FFT voice communications to the speaker
circuits in order to allow voice paging over the speaker circuit from a telephone
e. handset.
The digital audio message generator shall be of reliable, non-moving parts, and
support the digital storage of up to 32 minutes of tones and emergency
messages, shall support programming options to string audio segments
together to create up to 1000 messages, or to loop messages and parts of
f. messages to repeat for pre-determined cycles or indefinitely.

The proposed product shall not restrict the buyer to one single organization,
not shall it require any proprietary dongle or other programming tools for
12 after sales & maintenance activity.
13 The MTBF for the product offered shall be less than 40

1.3 DESIGN INTENT

a) Main fire alarm panel with digital voice command system, Fire fighters
telephone, amplifier, zone selector keypad and announcement console –
Ground floor – Near passenger lift lobby.
b) Secondary fire alarm panels- At each level – near lift lobby
c) Active repeater panels at security cabin
d) All fire alarm panels connected as pier to pier.
e) Fire survival cables ( 750 deg. 2 hours)
f) Class - A cabling to loop all detectors, devices & MCP‟s to control panel.
g) Coverage per detector as per NFPA -2015, considering > 60 ACH
h) System integration (Soft integration) with all standalone panels such as
agent release panels for deluge valves, Pre-action panels, lift switchboard, DG
fresh air switchboard, etc
k) VESDA (Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus) to cover the false flooring
and room void areas of Data Hall, UPS, Battery rooms and MMR.
m) Emergency communication system, integral with the Main FACP, including
voice alarm system components, microphones, amplifiers, zone selector
keypads and tone generators
n) Audible Alarm Notifications
o) Fire fighters telephone system as part of main fire alarm system which is
two-way, supervised voice communication proposed to link between the
MFACP and remote fire fighters' telephone stations throughout the building (at
all staircases at all levels)

1.4 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

a) Protect from moisture by using appropriate coverings. Store at dry interior

locations.
b) Sequence work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation
of other products.
c) Supply as maintenance stock, consumable devices, components as
recommended by Supplier, but shall not be less than two units of each type/
rating of installed consumable material/ component/ device.
 d) For ease of service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable,
plug-in types and have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire. Terminal
blocks that are permanently fixed are not acceptable.
1.5 WARRANTY

The fire alarm control panel, voice panels and any head-end equipment shall
A. have a manufacturer’s warranty of a minimum of 12months.
1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PRODUCT APPROVALS

The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification.
The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if
A. applicable.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:

NFPA 12 Extinguishing Systems (low and high)

NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems
NFPA 16 Foam / Water Deluge and Spray Systems
NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
NFPA 90A Air Conditioning Systems
NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems
NFPA 92B Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:

UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 2572 Mass Notification Systems
UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
UL 228 Door Closers - Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
UL 2017 Standard for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems
UL60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

D. Factory Mutual – USA

E. Local and State Building Codes.

F. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

The system shall be certified for seismic applications in accordance with the
International Building Code (IBC). The basis for qualification of seismic
G. approval shall be via shake table testing.

The System shall be FM 6320 (Factory Mutual) approved as a Gas Detection

system when employed with the 4-20 monitor module and industry standard
H. 4-20 mA gas detectors.
1.7 APPROVED MAKES

A. Notifier
B. Ansul
C. Edwards

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:

Main FACP or network node shall contain a microprocessor based Central

Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply. The CPU shall communicate with and
control the following types of equipment used to make up the system:
intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable
A. modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

In conjunction with intelligent Loop Control Modules and Loop Expander

B. Modules, the main FACP shall perform the following functions:

Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor

1 modules connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility
2 by way of connection to addressable monitor and control modules.
Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm
condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as
3 programmed.
 System Capacity and General Operation

The FACP shall can communicate on a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative

communication format and protocol. The network shall support
communication speed up to 100 Mbps and support up to 200 panels / nodes
A. per network.

The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to 10 SLC loops. Each
module shall support up to 300 analog/addressable devices for a maximum
system capacity of 3000 points. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full
featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a
backlit 600-character liquid crystal display, individual, color coded system
status LEDs, and a QWERTY style alph anumeric QWERTY keypad for the field
programming and control of the fire alarm system. Said LCD shall also
support graphic bit maps capable of displaying the company name and logo of
B. either come owner or installing company.
All programming or editing of thmming or editing of the existing program in the
system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting
C. the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.

The FACP shall be able to provide the following software and hardware
D. features:

Pre-signal and Positive Alarm Sequence: The system shall provide means to
cause alarm signals to only sound in specific areas with a delay of the alarm
from 60 to up to 180 seconds after start of alarm processing. In addition, a
Positive Alarm Sequence selection shall be available that allows a 15-second
time period for acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire detection/initiating
device. If the alarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all local and
1 remote outputs shall automatically activate immediately.
Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel: To obtain early warning
of incipient or potential fire conditions, the system shall support a
programmable option to determine system response to real-time detector
sensing values above the programmed setting. Two levels of Pre-alarm
2 indication shall be available at the control panel: alert and action.
Alert: It shall be possible to set individual smoke detectors for pre-programmed
pre-alarm thresholds. If the individual threshold is reached, the pre-alarm
3 condition shall be activated.
Action: If programmed for Action and the detector reaches a level exceeding
the pre-programmed level, the control panel shall indicate an action condition.
Sounder bases installed with either heat or smoke detectors shall automatically
4 activate on action Pre-Alarm level, with general evacuation on Alarm level.
The system shall support a detector response time to meet world annunciation
5 requirements of less than 3 seconds.
Device Blink Control: Means shall be provided to turn off detector/module
6 LED strobes for special areas.
NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test: The system shall provide an
automatic smoke detector test function that meets the sensitivity testing
7 requirements of NFPA 72.
 Programmable Trouble Reminder: The system shall provide means to
automatically initiate a reminder that troubles exist in the system. The
reminder will appear on the system display and (if enabled) will sound a piezo
8 alarm.
On-line or Off-line programming: The system shall provide means to allow
panel programming either through an off-line software utility program away
from the panel or while connected and on-line. The system shall also support
upload and download of programmed database and panel executive system
program to a Personal Computer/laptop. A single change to one CPU database
9 shall not require a database download to other CPUs.
History Events: The panel shall maintain a history file of atleastlast 5000
events, each with a time and date stamp. History events shall include all
alarms, troubles, operator actions, and programming entries. The control
panels shall also maintain a 1000 event Alarm History buffer, which consists
10 of the 1000 most recent alarm events from the 5000 event history file.
Smoke Control Modes: The system shall provide means to perform Fire Smoke
Control Station mode. This mode controls all dampers, smoke extraction fan,
fresh air supply fans, etc during Fire condition. Smoke Control to meet
11 NFPA-92A and 90B and HVAC mode to meet NFPA 90A.
The system shall provide means for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be auto
programmed into the system by specific address. The system shall recognize
specific device type ID's and associate that ID with the corresponding address
12 of the device.
Passwords and Users: The system shall support two password levels, master
and user. Up to 9 user passwords shall be available, each of which may be
assigned access to the programming change menus, the alter status menus, or
both. Only the master password shall allow access to password change
13 screens.
Block Acknowledge: The system shall support a block Acknowledge for Trouble
14 Conditions
Sensitivity Adjust: The system shall provide Automatic Detector Sensitivity
15 Adjust based on Occupancy schedules including a Holiday list of up to 15 days.
Environmental Drift Control: The system shall provide means for setting
Environmental Drift Compensation by device. When a detector accumulates
dust in the chamber and reaches an unacceptable level but yet still below the
allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a maintenance alert warning.
When the detector accumulates dust in the chamber above the allowed limit,
16 the control panel shall indicate a maintenance urgent warning.
Custom Action Messages: The system shall provide means to enter up to 100
custom action messages of up to 160 characters each. It shall be possible to
17 assign any of the 100 messages to any point.
Local Mode: If communication is lost to the central processor the system shall
provide added survivability through the intelligent loop control modules.
Inputs from devices connected to the SLC and loop control modules shall
activate outputs on the same loop when the inputs and outputs have been set
with point programming to participate in local mode or when the type codes
are of the same type: that is, an input with a fire alarm type code shall activate
18 an output with a fire alarm type code.
Read status preview - enabled and disabled points: Prior to re-enabling points,
the system shall inform the user that a disabled device is in the alarm state.
This shall provide notice that the device must be reset before the device is
19 enabled thereby avoiding activation of the notification circuits.
 Custom Graphics: When fitted with an LCD display, the panel shall permit
20 uploading of a custom bit-mapped graphic to the display screen.
Multi-Cooperating Detectors: The system shall provide means to link one
detector with up to two detectors at other addresses in cooperative
multi-detector sensing. The detector shall take feedback from the other two
adjacent detectors to take fast and genuine alarm decision mitigating the risk
of false alarm. There shall be no requirement for mandatory sequential
address setting in the detectors to achieve this function. Multi-cooperative
detection shall be a built-in intelligence in the system to take fast & reliable
decision on genuine alarm triggering. The alarm event shall be aresult ofall
cooperating detector chamber readings considered as a consolidated alarm
21 signal.
ACTIVE EVENT: The system shall provide a Type ID called FIRE CONTROL for
purposes of air-handling shutdown, which shall be intended to override normal
operating automatic functions. Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point shall
cause the control panel to (1) initiate the monitor module Control-by-Event, (2)
send a message to the panel display, history buffer, installed printer and
annunciators, (3) shall not light an indicator at the control panel, (4) Shall
display ACTIVE on the LCD as well a display a FIRE CONTROL Type Code and
22 other information specific to the device.
NON-FIRE Alarm Module Reporting: A point with a type ID of NON-FIRE shall be
available for use for energy management or other non-fire situations.
NON-FIRE point operation shall not affect control panel operation nor shall it
display a message at the panel LDC. Activation of a NON-FIRE point shall
activate control by event logic but shall not cause any indication on the control
23 panel.
Mass Notification Override: The system shall be UL 2572 listed for Mass
Notification and shall be capable, based on the Risk Analysis, of being
programmed so that Mass Notification/Emergency Communications events
24 take precedence over fire alarm events.
Security Monitor Points: The system shall provide means to monitor any
25 point as a type security.
One-Man Walk Test: The system shall provide both a basic and advanced walk
test for testing the entire fire alarm system. The basic walk test shall allow a
single operator to run audible tests on the panel. All logic equation
automation shall be suspended during the test and while annunciators can be
enabled for the test, all shall default to the disabled state. During an advanced
walk test, field-supplied output point programming will react to input stimuli
such as Control By Event and logic equations. When points are activated in
advanced test mode, each initiating event shall latch the input. The advanced
test shall be audible and shall be used for pull station verification, magnet
activated tests on input devices, input and output device and wiring
26 operation/verification.
Control By Event Functions: CBE software functions shall provide means to
program a variety of output responses based on various initiating events. The
control panel shall operate CBE through lists of zones. A zone shall become
listed when it is added to a point's zone map through point programming. Each
input point such as detector, monitor module or panel circuit module shall
27 support listing of up to 10 zones into its programmed zone map.
Permitted zone types shall be general zone, releasing zone and special zone.
Each output point (control module, panel circuit module) can support a list of
up to 10 zones including general zone, logic zone, releasing zone and trouble
28 zone. It shall be possible for output points to be assigned to list general
 alarm. Non-Alarm or Supervisory points shall not activate the general alarm
zone.

1000 General Zones: The system shall support up to 1000 general purpose
software zones for linking inputs to outputs. When an input device activates,
any general zone programmed into that device's zone map will be active and
any output device that has an active general zone in its map will be active. It
29 shall also be possible to use general zone as arguments in logic equations.
1000 Logic Equations: The system shall support up to 1000 logic equations for
AND, OR, NOT, ONLY1, ANYX, XZONE or RANGE operators that allow
conditional I/O linking. When any logic equation becomes true, all output
30 points mapped to the logic zone shall activate.
100 trouble equations per device: The system shall provide support for up to
100 trouble equations for each device, which shall permit programming
parameters to be altered, based on specific fault conditions. If the trouble
equation becomes true, all output points mapped to the trouble zone shall
31 activate.
Control-By-Time: A time based logic function shall be available to delay an
action for a specific period of time based upon a logic input with tracking
feature. A latched version shall also be available. Another version of this
shall permit activation on specific days of the week or year with ability to set
32 and restore based on a 24 hour time schedule on any day of the week or year.
Multiple agent releasing zones: The system shall support up to 10 releasing
zones to protect against 10 independent hazards. Releasing zones shall provide
up to three cross-zone and four abort options to satisfy any local jurisdiction
33 requirements.
Alarm Verification, by device, with timer and tally: The system shall provide a
user-defined global software timer function that can be set for a specific
detector. The timer function shall delay an alarm signal for a user-specified
time period and the control panel shall ignore the alarm verification timer if
34 another alarm is detected during the verification period.
E. Central Processing Unit

The Central Processing Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event
(including Boolean functions including but not limited to AND, OR, NOT, ANYx,
and CROSSZONE) programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition
is detected by the system. Such control-by-event programs shall be held in
non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost with system primary
1 and secondary power failure.
The Central Processing Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time
annotation, to the second, of all system events. The time-of-day and date shall
2 not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.
The CPU shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring the
use of any external programming equipment. Systems that require the use of
3 external programmers or change of EPROMs are not acceptable.
The CPU shall provide an RS-232 interface between the fire alarm control panel
4 and the UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals.
The CPU shall provide two RS-485 ports for the serial connection to
5 annunciation and control subsystem components.
6 The RS-232 serial output circuit shall be optically isolated to assure protection
 from earth ground.
In the event of CPU failure, all SLC loop modules shall fallback to degrade
mode. Systems not offering degrade mode shall offer Redundant CPU. Such
degrade mode shall treat the corresponding SLC loop control modules and
associated detection devices as conventional two-wire operation. Any
activation of a detector in this mode shall automatically activate associated
7 Notification Appliance Circuits.

F. Display

1. The system display shall provide a 600-character backlit alphanumeric

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide eleven Light-Emitting-Diodes
(LEDs) that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER,
FIRE ALARM, PREALARM, SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, SYSTEM TROUBLE, OTHER
EVENT, SIGNALS SILENCED, POINT DISABLED, CONTROLS ACTIVE, and CPU
FAILURE.
2. These characters shall be only for fire alarm / trouble information and
not for Logo or other purpose. It shall be UL Listed. Repeater panel displays in
FACP is not allowed unless until approved by UL
3. The system display shall provide a QWERTY QWERTY style keypad for
ease of operation.
4. The keypad shall have control capability to command all system
functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field
programming without the use of any external equipment or laptop. Two
different password levels with up to ten (one Master and nine User) passwords
shall be accessible through the display interface assembly to prevent
unauthorized system control or programming.

G. Loop (Signaling Line Circuit) Control Module:

The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to 10 SLC loops. Each
module shall support up to 300 analog/addressable devices for a maximum
1 system capacity of 3000 points.
The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be
capable of operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input
shall be capable of activating any or all addressable device outputs) in the
2 unlikely event of a failure in the main CPU.
3 Each loop shall maintain 20% spare capacity for future expansion.
Each Loop shall be capable of operating as a NFPA Class B circuit in case of
single open circuit fault in existing SLC Circuit Fault isolation modules shall be
installed between each addressable SLC device per the manufacturers
installation instructions. Systems which cannot provide full loop loading in Style
4 7 configurations are not acceptable.
 The SLC interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all
intelligent detectors and shall process this information to determine whether
normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular device. Each SLC
Loop shall be isolated and equipped to annunciate an Earth Fault condition.
The SLC interface board software shall include software to automatically
maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of
environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector.
The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and
5 the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.

H. Network Communication

The FACP shall communicate over a peer-to-peer communication network,

inherently over a regenerative communication format and protocol. The
network shall support communication speed up to 100 Mbps and support up to
200 Control Panels/ Network Nodes, over a single medium (copper conductor
/ fiber optic), redundant ring, communication channel for fire alarm, voice
evacuation and telephone talk-back system. The system shall support up to
200 such networks in a single system.
The network card shall have inbuilt Fiber port for terminating Fiber Optic
Cable without any third party converters.

I. Digital Voice Command Center

The Digital Voice Command Center located with the FACP, shall contain all
equipment required for all audio control, emergency telephone system control,
signaling and supervisory functions. This shall include speaker zone indication
and control, telephone circuit indication and control, digital voice units,
1 microphone and main telephone handset.
Function: The Voice Command Center equipment shall perform the following
2 functions:

Operate as a supervised multi-channel emergency voice communication

a. system.
Operate as a two-way emergency telephone system control center.
Audibly and visually annunciate the active or trouble condition of every
b. speaker circuit and emergency telephone circuit.
Audibly and visually annunciate any trouble condition for digital tone and voice
c. units required for normal operation of the system.
Provide all-call Emergency Paging activities through activation of a single
d. control switch.
As required, provide vectored paging control to specific audio zones via
e. dedicated control switches.
Provide a factory recorded "library" of voice messages and tones in standard
WAV. File format, which may be edited and saved on a PC running a current
f. Windows® operating system.
Provide a software utility capable of off-line programming for the DVC
operation and the audio message files. This utility shall support the creation
of new programs as well as editing and saving existing program files.
g. Uploading or downloading the DVC shall not inhibit the emergency operation
 of other nodes on the fire alarm network.

Support an optional mode of operation with four analog audio outputs capable
of being used with UL 864 fire-listed analog audio amplifiers and SLC controlled
h. switching.
The Digital Voice Command shall be modular in construction, and shall be
capable of being field programmable without requiring the return of any
components to the manufacturer and without requiring use of any external
i. computers or other programming equipment.
The Digital Voice Command and associated equipment shall be protected
j. against unusually high voltage surges or line transients.
j. Fire, Voice & Telephone data shall flow through single network cable.
The Voice Evacuation System shall be capable of establishing communication
between the master voice controller and amplifier over fiber optic cable
k. network without using any third party media converter.
Failure of Fire Panel CPU shall not affect the operation of DVC. Incase DVC /
Amplifiers are controlled by Fire Panel CPU, a separate panel with dedicated
l. CPU shall be considered for each DVC & Amplifier.
J. Power Supply

The Main Power Supply shall operate on 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shall
1 provide all necessary power for the FACP.
The Main Power Supply shall provide the required power to the CPU using a
switching 24 VDC regulator and shall incorporate a battery charger for 24 hours
2 of standby power using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge.
The Main Power Supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby
using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. The supply shall
be capable of charging batteries ranging in capacity from 7-200 amp-hours
3 within a 48-hour period.
The Main Power Supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect
4 circuit, capable of detecting earth faults.
5 The Main Power Supply shall be power-limited per UL864 requirements.
The Main Power Supply shall communicate power supply, line voltage, battery
status and charger status to the local LCD display. Any abnormal condition shall
6 be annunicated and logged to the system alarm history log.
The interface to the power supply from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
shall be via the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or other multiplexed means Power
supplies that do not use an intelligent interface are not suitable substitutes.
The required wiring from the FACP to the addressable power supply shall be a
7 single unshielded twisted pair wire.
The addressable power supply shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC
power loss, power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground
fault detection. In the event of a trouble condition, the addressable power
supply shall report the incident and the applicable address to the FACP via the
13 SLC.
 The addressable power supply shall have an AC Power Loss Delay option. If this
option is utilized and the addressable power supply experiences an AC power
loss, reporting of the incident to the FACP will be delayed. A delay time of zero,
14 two, eight or sixteen hours shall be programmable.
The addressable power supply shall have an option for Canadian Trouble
15 Reporting and this option shall be programmable.
The addressable power supply mounts in either the FACP backbox or it's own
16 dedicated surface mounted backbox with cover.
Each of the power supply's four output circuits shall be programmed- for
Notification Appliance Circuit or General Purpose 24 VDC power. Any output
17 circuit shall be able to provide up to 2.5 amps of 24 VDC power.
The addressable power supply's output circuits shall be individually supervised
when they are selected to be either a Notification Appliance Circuit when wired
Class "A" or by the use of and end-of-line resistor. When the power supply's
output circuit is selected as General 24 VDC power, the circuit shall be
18 individually supervised when an end-of-line relay is used.
When selected for Notification Appliance Circuits, the output circuits shall be
19 individually programmable for Steady, March Time, Dual Stage or Temporal.
When selected as a Notification Appliance Circuit, the output circuits of the
addressable power supply shall have the option to be coded by the use of a
20 universal zone coder.
The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other
power supplies of the same type. The required wiring to interface multiple
21 addressable power supplies shall be a single unshielded, twisted pair wire.
An individual or multiple interfaced addressable power supplies shall have the
option to use an external charger for battery charging. Interfaced power
22 supplies shall have the option to share backup battery power.

K. Audio Amplifiers

The Audio Amplifiers shall provide Audio Power @25 Volts RMS@70 Volts RMS
1 for distribution to speaker circuits.
Multiple audio amplifiers may be mounted in a single enclosure, either to
supply incremental audio power, or to function as an automatically switched
2 backup amplifier(s).
The audio amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide
3 built-in LED indicators for the following conditions:

a. Earth Fault Detection & Annunciation for Communication bus

b. Audio Amplifier Failure Trouble Annunciation
c. External trigger input indication in case of Amplifier failure
d. Audio Detected on Firefighter's Telephone Riser
e. Receiving Audio from digital audio riser
i. Short circuit on detection &annunciation on each speaker circuit
j. Communication Status
n. Board failure
r. Active fiber optic media connection
 Power supply monitoring of below conditions –Earth fault, Low Battery,
t. Charger Trouble

Adjustment of the correct audio level for the amplifier shall not require any
5 special tools or test equipment.
Includes audio input and amplified output supervision, back up input, and
6 automatic switch over function, (if primary amplifier should fail).
7 System shall be capable of backing up digital amplifiers.
One designated backup amplifier shall be capable of backing up multiple
8 primary amplifiers mounted in the same or adjacent cabinets.
Multi-channel operation from a single amplifier shall be supported by the
9 addition of an optional plug-in amplifier card.
System shall support distributed architecture of voice evacuation system to
enable remote installation of amplifiers. Remote Amplifier’s shall
10 communicate with the centrally located Digital Voice Command.

L. Controls with associated LED Indicators

1 Speaker Switches/Indicators
The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall include visual indication of
a. active and trouble status for each speaker circuit in the system.
The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or
b. deactivate each speaker circuit in the system.\
2 Emergency Two-Way Telephone Control Switches/Indicators
The emergency telephone circuit control panel shall include visual indication of
a. active and trouble status for each telephone circuit in the system.
The telephone circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate
b. or deactivate each telephone circuit in the system.

M. Field Programming

The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field

without the need for special tools. There shall be no firmware changes
required to field modify the system time, point information, equations, or
1 annunciator programming/information.
2
All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Two levels of
password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One
level shall be used for status level changes such as point/zone disable or
manual on/off commands (Building Manager). A second (higher-level) shall be
used for actual change of the life safety program (installer). These passwords
shall be five (5) digits at a minimum. Upon entry of an invalid password for the
third time within a one minute time period an encrypted number shall be
displayed. This number can be used as a reference for determining a forgotten
password.
 6. The installer's field programming and hardware shall be functionally
tested on a computer against known parameters/norms which are established
by the FACP manufacturer. A software program shall test Input-to-Output
correlations, device Type ID associations, point associations, time equations,
etc. This test shall be performed on an IBM-compatible PC with a verification
software package. A report shall be generated of the test results and two
copies turned in to the engineer(s) on record.

N. Specific System Operations

Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the
sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the
system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and
1 have a minimum of 9 levels.
Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the
system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified
detector. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 0 to 60
seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The
FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered
the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper
2 operator commands.
O. System Point Operations

Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be enabled or
1 disabled through the system keypad or Graphics User Interface.
System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the
2 system keypad or the video terminal.
Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status
diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point
3 shall be annunciated for the parameters listed:

a. Device Status.
b. Device Type.
c. Custom Device Label.
d. Software Zone Label.
e. Device Zone Assignments.
f. Analog Detector Sensitivity.
g. All Program Parameters.

System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall
contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 5000 system
events. Each of these events will be stored, with time and date stamp, until an
operator requests that the contents be either displayed or printed. The
contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed; one event at a time,
and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed.
History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and
4 programming entries.
The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems which use volatile
5 memory for history storage are not acceptable.
 Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall
automatically interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the
6 detector responses over a period of time.
If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below
or above normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the
particular Intelligent Detector will be annunciated on the system display, and
printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the
receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special
7 hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.
The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a "pre-alarm"
condition. This will be used to alert maintenance personal when a detector is at
8 80% of its alarm threshold in a 60 second period.
2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Network Control Annunciator

A network control annunciator shall be provided to display all system

intelligent points. The NCA shall be capable of displaying all information for
200,000 points on the network. Network display devices, which are only
capable of displaying a subset of network points, shall not be suitable
substitutes.

The NCA shall include a minimum of 600 characters, backlit by a long life, solid
state LCD display. It shall also include a full QWERTY style keypad with tactile
feel. Additionally, the network display shall include ten soft-keys for screen
navigation and the ability to scroll events by type. i.e. Fire Alarm, Supervisory
Alarm, Trouble, etc.

The network control annunciator shall have the ability to display up to eight
events in order of priority and time of occurrence. Counters shall be provided
to indicate the total number of events by type.

The NCA shall mount in any of the network node fire alarm control panels.
Optionally, the network display may mount in a backbox designed for this
useand shall connect to the network over either a wire or fiber interface.

The network control annunciator shall have an event history buffer capable of
storing a minimum of 1000 events in non-volatile memory. Additionally, the
NCA shall have a fire alarm history buffer capable of storing a minimum of 200
events in non-volatile memory. Systems that do not protect fire alarm events
from being overwritten by other events are not suitable substitutes.

The NCA shall include two optically isolated, 9600 baud, industry standard
RS-232 ports for UL864 listed printers and CRT's. These peripheral devices shall
print or display network activity.

The network control annunciator shall include control switches for system wide
control of Acknowledge, Signal Silence, System Reset, Drill, and local Lamp
Test. A mechanical means by which the controls switches are "locked out",
such as a key, shall be available.
 The NCA shall include long life LEDs to display Power, Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm,
Security Alarm, System Trouble, Supervisory, Signals Silenced, Disabled Points,
Other (non-fire) Events, and CPU Failure.

The network control annunciator shall include a Master password and up to

nine User passwords. Each password shall be up to eight alpha-numeric
characters in length. The Master password shall be authorized to access the
programming and alter status menus. Each User password may have
different levels of authorization assigned by the Master password.

The NCA shall allow editing of labels for all points within the network; control
on/off of outputs; enable/disable of all network points; alter detector
sensitivity; clear detector verification counters for any analog addressable
detector within the network; clear any history log within the network; change
the Time/Date settings; initiate a Walk Test.

The network control annunciator shall support an optional WindowsTM based

program utility. This utility shall allow the user create an NCA database,
upload/download an NCA database, and download an upgrade to the NCA
executive. To ensure program validity, this utility shall check stored
databases for errors. A compare function shall be included to identify
differences between databases.

For time keeping purposes the NCA shall include a time of day clock.
B. Network Control Station / Graphics User Interface
The NCS shall utilize a Microsoft(tm) operating system. Each Network Control
Station shall be capable of graphically annunciating and controlling all network
activity and at least 2,50,000 network points. Network display devices that are
only capable of displaying a subset of network points shall not be suitable
substitutes.

The NCS shall be an IBM (or compatible) personal computer with the following
minimum requirements: Intel Pentium II(tm)-processor, operating at a
minimum of 400 Mhz, 128Mbytes of RAM, 8 Mbytes Video RAM, 1.44 Mbyte
floppy drive, 3.2 Gbyte hard disk, mouse, 32X CD-ROM, 3PCI / 1 ISA expansion
slots, internal 3.2 Gbyte tape drive, sound card, 200 watt power supply, and
SVGA graphics with a screen resolution of 1024 x 768. The network control
station shall include a 19-inch monitor.

The NCS shall be capable of storing over 100,000 network events in a history
file. Events shall be stored on hard disk and shall be capable of back-up storage
to a tape drive. The history buffer allows the operator to view events in a
chronological order. A filter shall be available for displaying chronological
events by operator, date, time, fire alarms, troubles (including security,
supervisory and system/device), disabled points/zones, system programming,
operator response and operator log in/log out. The ability to print NCS history
files shall also be available.
The NCS shall use a Windows(tm) dialog box technology to address,
interrogate, control, and/or modify intelligent points on each fire alarm node.
This shall include, and not be limited to: Activating outputs, enabling or
disabling points, adding or removing intelligent points, viewing intelligent
detector sensitivity levels and modifying point information (custom messages,
detector type, verification, day/night selection etc.)

The NCS shall include the ability to display system information in a graphical
(floor plan) form. Each view, created using standard Windows bitmap files,
shall include icons created for intelligent devices. These icons shall blink and
change to the appropriate programmed icon when an event occurs. When the
device has been acknowledged, the icon shall become steady. Once the point
has returned to normal, the normal icon is displayed. In addition to the
graphical representation of the device, the user shall be able to link pictures,
documents and sound files to the device. The NCS shall also provide the ability
to auto-vector to the floor plan (screen) of the device that is active. By selecting
a device in the graphic presentation, the operator of the NCS shall have the
ability to log onto the corresponding node and interrogate the associated
intelligent point.

The NCS shall have the ability to provide the following information through a
Windows(tm) pull down menu: An Event Counter that contains the number of
new and total events on the network. The information that is displayed shall
consist of Fire Alarms, Pre-Alarms, Security Alarms, Supervisory Alarms, and
Troubles. A Detailed Event window that contains all Off-Normal events, both
unacknowledged and acknowledged that are present in the system. It shall
contain two views, Fire events and Non-fire events that shall be user
selectable. A Current Event window that shall contain all network and local
events as well as system messages with a maximum of 1,000 events displayed.
A Disabled Device window that shall contain all disabled devices in the system.

The NCS shall have the option, from a Windows pull down menu, to connect to
a third party paging service that allows the NCS to automatically send
text-based messages regarding system status to a typical text pager.

The NCS shall include help screens, available to aid the user without leaving the
selected application screen.

The NCS shall be UL-Listed for fire protection (UL864) and burglary (UL1076).

The NCS shall interface with other panels as a node in the pear to pear
network.

The operator shall be able to monitor the FFT system from GUI software and
shall be able to monitor and control Integrated Voice Evacuation System.

The NCS shall have a flexible way of assigning operator passwords. There shall
be an unlimited number of possible operators, each with specific levels of
control. Each operator shall have his/her own password. Operator password
and control selection shall be available to a high level "administrator" who shall
have complete control over levels of control. If no action has taken place on
 the NCS after 10 minutes, the current operator shall be logged out and require
a new log-in.

The NCS shall include an industry-standard RS-232 port for a UL864 listed
printer.

The NCS shall be a table top hardware configuration.

C. Interactive Firefighters’ Touchscreen Display

The network will interface and report the individually monitored system’s
alarm status via a user-friendly Graphical User Interface (GUI) based software.

The software shall operate under Microsoft® Windows® XP Embedded platform

as manufactured by Microsoft Corporation.

The GUI based software must be capable of graphically representing the facility
being monitored with floor plans and icons depicting the actual locations of the
fire alarm device locations. It shall be capable of mapping at least 2,50,000
network points

The software shall use a 1280 pixel x 1024 pixel GUI display capable of showing
a large primary floor plan display, a site plan representative of an aerial view of
the facility, the first active fire alarm on the system.

The software shall permit automatic navigation to the screen containing an

icon that represents the first fire alarm device in alarm in the event of an
off-normal condition.

The fire alarm device icon shall be visible only when it is in an alarm (or active)
condition.

The software shall display the activated smoke detectors in a time sequence to
track smoke progression.

The software shall allow the importation of externally developed floor plans in
Windows Metafile (WMF), JPEG (JPG), Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) and
Bitmap (BMP) format.

The software shall provide a intuitive and easy way to navigate to different
screens representing floors and areas within a facility.

The system shall provide for continuous monitoring of all fire alarm conditions
regardless of the current activity displayed on the screen.
 The software shall display “YOU ARE HERE” along with icons representing
standard building objects (stairs, elevators, etc) to be shown on the floor plan.

The software shall allow icons that represent hazardous materials stored in a
facility.

The software shall provide a screen that displays preprogrammed building

contact information.

The software shall provide a screen the displays building occupancy and other
general building information.

The software shall allow a site plan to be imported that shows an aerial view of
the facility.

The software shall display all active fire, supervisory, and security events within
an event list.

D. Cloud Based Facility Management Software

Remote health monitoring solution utilizing cloud based software-as-a-service

web application & supplementary network gateway hardware. System shall
provide secure web access to cloud based web application using any of the web
browsers like Google Chrome (preferable), Internet Explorer etc. from any
computer/ tablet/ Smartphone connected over internet via defined credentials
– username and password. Supplementary FACP gateway hardware furnished
in this section shall be programmable directly from the embedded webpage in
the hardware, upon completion of this project. The use of configurable or
programmable controllers that require additional software tools for
post-installation maintenance shall not be acceptable. The cloud based web
application shall capture all fire alarm system data as received from the system
via supplementary gateway hardware. Owner shall receive login and passwords
at first training session. The Owner shall have full licensing and full access rights
for remote monitoring system.

A. Cloud Based Application: The cloud hosted web application shall

provide an intuitive user interface and shall provide the following features as a
minimum:

1. Real time view of fire system effectiveness

2. Multi-location unified view
3. Custom dashboard view
4. Device level detailed information including current status
5. Event list
6. System reports
a. Fault Handling
b. Device Replacement & contamination
c. Panel & System report
d. Custom reports
7. Report export in PDF/ DOC format
8. Report scheduler Settings – add, delete, modify email addresses
9. Email ID settings for emailing critical alarms

B. Web Browser Navigation: The cloud hosted web application shall

provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it
shall be constructed to "feel" like a single application, and provide a complete
and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to
navigate through the system using Google Chrome web browser to accomplish
requirements of this specification. The Web application shall (as a minimum)
provide for navigation, and for display of intuitive dashboards, device
information, alarms/events, reports, configuration menus for report settings
C. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate
domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page
that will require a login name and strong password. Navigation in the system
shall be dependent on the operator's role-based application control privileges.
D. Navigation: Navigation through the web application shall be
accomplished by clicking on dynamic links on dashboards to access detailed
system information and by clicking on appropriate tabs for application settings
and preferences. Both the tabs and dynamic links shall be displayed
simultaneously, enabling the operator to select a specific system information
and application settings and preferences.
E. System Dashboards: The system dashboard shall provide several
functional information for each system specified. This view shall be accessed by
right after logging in to the system:
1. Each building dashboard (in case of multiple buildings) shall be visible
along with system effectiveness and fire alarm system information like –
a. Number of panels
b. Number of loops
c. Number of devices

2. Detailed information Section – this can be accessed upon clicking

relevant links. Detailed system information like device list along with
corresponding address, current status and time stamping can be viewed.
Events data is also visible.
3. Search: User shall have multiple options for searching data based upon
device type, device status.
F. Reports: The Web application can be used to access system health
reports of past and as-on-date. Provision for system reports to be emailed to
predefined email IDs and time intervals in PDF or DOC format. Different report
types –
1. Fault Handling report – Effective measurement of turnaround time
(TAT) of various
issues and capable of drawing detailed report at individual fault level.
2. Device Replacement Report - Proactive alerts along with active insights
on the faulty devices & detectors which need attention or replacement helping
customers save time and reducing fire risk.
 3. Device Contamination Report - Real time statistics of device
contamination showing dirt levels along with detector efficiency
4. Panel & System Report - List of panel faults with trouble date and
time stamped, beyond the panel memory of 5000 events can store upto
100,000 events

G. Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific equipment and or device,

shall be displayed dynamically in a window.
1. The Alarm remain in the application until it is acknowledged or Panel is
reset.
2. The Alarm status also viewed in the LIST VIEW section of the
application.
H. Security Access: Cloud hosted Remote monitoring web application for
fire alarm system can be accessed by Google chrome web browser and shall
require a Login Name and Strong Password. Separate access credentials for
owner and service provider shall be provisioned.

2.3 GATEWAY AND WEB SERVERS

BACnet Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced

with BACNet compliant clients. A BACnet interface supporting BACnet/IP
communication shall be available from the fire alarm control panel
[Link] shall support 14000 data points. BACnet gateway shall
A. communicate with all the panels in a peer to peer network.

MODbus Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced

with MODbus compliant clients. A MODbus interface supporting MODbus/TCP
communication shall be available from the fire alarm control panel
manufacturer. MODbus shall support 22500 data points. MODbus gateway
B. shall communicate with all the panels in a peer to peer network.

Webserver: The system shall support a web server allowing remote

connection via the Internet or Intranet. Authorized users will have the ability to
view panel/network history, event status and device properties. The
webserver shall also support sending event information via email or text to up
to 50 registered users, the webserver shall be available from the fire alarm
C. control panel manufacturer.

Web Portal Interface: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with a
web portal to integrate with Inspection and Service Manager utilities. The
web portal and inspection and service manager utilities shall be available from
D. the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

A. Addressable Devices – General

 Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary
decimal switches. Addressable devices that require the address be
1 programmed using a programming utility are not an allowable substitute.
Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal
2 address switches.
Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as
a DIP-switch, are not an allowable substitute. Addressable devices that require
the address be programmed using a special tool or programming utility are not
3 an allowable substitute.
Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with
4 two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.
Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and
power/polling bi-colour LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal
conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular
communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into
steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition
has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be
removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be
6 provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment
through field programming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis
7 shall automatically adjust sensitivity.
Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their
performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated
8 sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72.
The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock
base with tamper proof feature. Base options shall include a sounder base with
a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator
base designed for Style 7 applications. The system shall also support an
intelligent programmable sounder base, the programmable sounder base shall
be capable of providing multiple tones based on programming and at a
minimum be capable of providing a Temp-4 tone for CO (Carbon Monoxide)
activation and a Temp-3 tone for fire activations and be capable of being
synchronized with other programmable sounder bases and common area
9 notification appliances; 85 DBA minimum.
Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control
10 panel shall use to identify the type of device (PHOTO, THERMAL).
Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply
measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to
the FACP based on real-time measured values. The FACP software, not the
detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the
sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the
11 system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.
Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control
12 panel shall use to identify the type of device.
A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules.
Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the
13 alarm threshold.
Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8
14 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure
 shall be available.

B. Addressable Manual Call Point (Break Glass / Pull Down Type)

Addressable manual call point shall send data to the panel representing the
state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status.
They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that
after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use
1 except by the use of a key.
All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and
2 utilize a key type reset.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan / ABS Plastic with clearly
visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE / Fire Sign
3 shall appear on the front of the stations.

C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector:

The intelligent photoelectric smoke detector shall use the photoelectric

(light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command
from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of
smoke density.

D. Intelligent High Sensitivity Photo Smoke Detector

The intelligent high sensitivity photo smoke detector shall be a spot type
detector that incorporates an extremely bright high sensitivity diode and an
integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small volume near a receiving
photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the photo sensor.

The high sensitivity detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust
1 accumulation is reduced significantly.
The intelligent high sensitivity photo detector shall have nine sensitivity
2 levels and be sensitive to a minimum obscuration of 0.02 percent per foot.
The high sensitivity detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings
3 or PVC pipe.
The intelligent high sensitivity photo detector shall support standard, relay,
4 isolator and sounder detector bases.
The high sensitivity photo detector shall not require other cleaning
requirements than those listed in NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or
5 specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not be required.
The high sensitivity photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash
6 green in normal operation and turn on steady red in alarm.

E. Intelligent Multi Criteria Detector

 The intelligent multi-criteria detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a
single sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its
environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine its
environment and choose the appropriate sensing settingsfor early detection
and reduction in false alarm. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity
window, 0.5 to 2.5% per foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced
electronics that react to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties all within
a single sensing device.

The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate

sensitivity levels based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing,
kitchen etc.) and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as
1 the environment changes (as walls are moved or as the occupancy changes).
The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to
combine the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric
signal in an effort to react hastily in the event of a fire situation. It shall also
include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false
alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke
sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and
2 deceptive phenomena.

F. Intelligent Thermal Detectors

The intelligent thermal detectors shall be addressable devices rated at 135

degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated
at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. A high heat thermal detector
rated at 190 degrees Fahrenheit (87.8 degrees Celsius) shall also be available.
The thermal detectors shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control
panel signaling line circuit.

G. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector

The smoke detector housing shall accommodate an intelligent photoelectric

detector that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification
from the panel. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated
at the FACP, and appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems
to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout
the areas served by the duct system. The Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector
shall support the installation of addressable Photoelectric detector capable or
being tested remotely.

H. Advanced Multi-Criteria Intelligent Fire/CO Detector

Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO detector be an addressable advanced

multi-criteria smoke detector with a separate signal for carbon monoxide (CO)
1 detection per UL 2075 standards.
 The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements, including a
photoelectric (light-scattering) particulate sensor, an electrochemical CO
sensor, a daylight-filtered infrared (IR) sensor and solid state thermal
sensor(s) rated at 135°F (57.2°C). The device shall be able to indicate distinct
2 smoke and heat alarms.
The advanced multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to
combine the signal of the photoelectric signal with other sensing elements in
order to react quickly in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the
inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a nuisance alarm
condition. The detector shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity
levels based on the environment type (office, manufacturing, kitchen, etc.) in
which it is installed, and then have the ability to automatically change the
3 setting as the environment changes.
The CO detector component shall be capable of a functional gas test using a
4 canned test agent to test the functionality of the CO sensing cell.
The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means
of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The device shall provide
unique signals to indicate when 20 percent of the drift range is remaining,
when 100 percent of drift range is used, and when there is a chamber fault to
5 show the unit requires maintenance.
The detector shall indicate CO trouble conditions, including six months of
sensor life remaining and sensor life has expired. The detector shall indicate a
combined signal for any of the following: low chamber trouble, thermistor
6 trouble, CO self test failure, IR self test failure, and freeze warning.
The detector shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using
rotary switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use
binary jumpers or DIP switches to set the detector address are not acceptable.
The detector shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel
shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a special
programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at
the panel) are labor intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any
one of at least 159 possible addresses on the signaling line circuit (SLC) loop. It
7 responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and status.
The detector shall provide a test means whereby it will simulate an alarm
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be
initiated at the detector itself (by activating a switch) or initiated remotely on
command from the control panel. There shall be four test methods: functional
8 magnet, smoke entry aerosol, carbon monoxide aerosol or direct heat method.
The detector shall provide two LEDs to provide 360° visibility. The LEDs shall be
placed into steady red illumination by the control panel indicating that an
alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be
provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. The detector
must be capable of connecting to a sounder base that provides both temporal
9 3 and temporal 4 patterns for fire and CO alarm.
Two LEDs on the sensor shall be controlled by the panel to indicate sensor
status. Coded signals, transmitted from the panel, shall cause the LEDs to blink,
latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control panel technical documentation for
10 sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm.
 The detector shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock base. The detector shall
be constructed of off-white, UV-resistant polymer and shall be detachable from
the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting
base wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector
shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The
mounting base shall be mounted on a junction box that is at least 1.5 inches
(3.81 cm) deep. The mounting base shall be available to mount to standard
11 junction boxes. Suitable boxes include:

a. 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring.
b. 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box.
c. 3.5" (8.89 cm) octagonal box.
d. Single-gang box.
e. Double-gang box

12 Meets Agency Standards

a. ANSI/UL 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems

b. CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems
c. FM 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling
d. UL 2075 – Gas and Vapor Detector and Sensors – Systems Connected

I. Intelligent Addressable Aspiration Detector

The intelligent aspiration detector shall be an addressable aspiration detector

that communicates directly with the fire alarm control panel via the SLC
communication protocol, no modules or high level interfaces shall be
required. The fire alarm control panel shall support up to thirty one intelligent
aspiration detectors per SLC loop. The aspiration detector shall have dual
source (blue LED and infra-red laser) optical smoke detection for a wide range
of fire detection with enhanced immunity to nuisance particulates. The FACP
shall be capable of monitoring and annunciating up to five smoke event
thresholds and eleven trouble conditions. Each event threshold shall be
capable of being assigned a discrete type ID at the FACP.

J. Intelligent Addressable Reflected Beam Detector

1. The intelligent single-ended reflected beam smoke detector shall

connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit
(SLC). The detectors shall consist of a transmitter/receiver unit and a reflector
and shall send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke
density. The detector shall be capable of being tested remotely via a keyswitch;
It shall be equipped with an integral sensitivity test feature.
2. The Beam Detectors shall be long range, projected beam type smoke
detectors which consist of a Transmitter and receiver in a single unit and
reflector on the other side.
 3. The Beam Detector shall have a range upto 100 mtrs. There shall be
multiple sensitivity levels. Starting from 25 %, 30 %, 40 %, 50 % and acclimate
levels also 30 % to 50 % and 40 % to 50 %. There shall be trouble alarm if
obscuration block is more than 96 %.

K. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module

Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC

zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to
1 one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs.
The IDC zone shall be suitable for Class A or Class B operation. An LED shall be
provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor
2 module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

L. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module

Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC

zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any
1 N.O. dry contact device)
The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B operation. An LED shall be
provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor
2 module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

M. Addressable Control Module

Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the

operation of one conventional circuit of compatible Notification Appliances, 24
1 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances
The control module NAC may be wired for Class A/B with a current rating of 2
2 Amps
Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised circuit from the
3 main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote supply.

N. Addressable Releasing Control Module

An addressable releasing module shall be available to supervise and control

1 compatible releasing agent solenoids
2 The module shall operate on a redundant protocol for added protection.
The module shall be configurable for Class A/B and support one 24 volt or
3 two 12 volt solenoids.

O. Addressable 4-20 mA Module

Addressable 4-20 mA module shall be available to monitor industry-standard,

linear-scale, 4-20 mA protocol sensors. The module converts the sensor output
to communication protocol that can be interpreted by the FACP for monitoring
and display
 The module shall support programming of up to five programmable event
1 thresholds.
The System shall be FM 6320 (Factory Mutual) approved as a Gas Detection
system when employed with the FMM-4-20 monitor module and industry
2 standard 4-20 mA gas detectors.

P. Addressable Relay Module

Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other
1 network building functions
The module shall provide two form C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and
2 up to 2.0 Amps inductive.
The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary devices energize at the
3 same time on the same pair of wires;
For multiple relay control a module shall be available that provides 6
4 programmable Form-C relays.

Q. Addressable Two-In / Two-Out Monitor/Relay Module

1 An addressable Two-In / Two-Out module shall be available.

The two-in/two-out module shall provide two Class B/Style B dry-contact input
circuits and two independent Form-C relaysrated at up to 3 Amps resistive and
2 up to 2.0 Amps inductive.

R. Isolator Module
Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short
circuits on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the
number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short
circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module
shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building.

If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically

open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected,
1 the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.
The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall
be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator
2 module after its normal operation.
The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that
the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short
3 circuit condition has been detected and isolated.

S. Serially Connected Annunciator

The annunciator shall communicate to the fire alarm control panel via an EIA
485 (multi-drop) two-wire communications loop. The system shall support two
6,000 ft. RS-485 wire runs. Up to 32 annunciators, each configured up to 96
points, may be connected to the connection, for a system capacity of 3,000
1 points of annunciation.
 An RS-485 repeater shall be available to extend the RS-485 wire distance in
2 3,000 ft. increments. The repeater shall be UL864 approved.
Each annunciator shall provide up to 96 alarm and 97 trouble indications using
a long-life programmable color LED's. Up to 96 control switches shall also be
available for the control of Fire Alarm Control Panel functions. The annunciator
will also have an "ON-LINE" LED, local piezo sounder, local acknowledge and
3 lamp test switch, and custom zone/function identification labels.
The annunciator may be field configured to operate as a "Fan Control
Annunciator". When configured as "Fan Control," the annunciator may be used
to manually control fan or damper operation and can be set to override
4 automatic commands to all fans/dampers programmed to the annunciator.
Annunciator switches may be programmed for System control such as, Global
Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence, Global System Reset, and on/off control of
5 any control point in the system.
An optional module shall be available to utilize annunciator points to drive
RS-485 driven relays. This shall extend the system point capacity by 3,000
6 remote contacts.
The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and
7 provide each of the features listed above.

T. Speakers

The Speaker appliance shall be listed to UL 1480 for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems. It shall be a dual-voltage transformer speaker capable of operation at
25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. The speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to
4,000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 32°F and 120°F. It
1 shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8-inch back box.
A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker
products. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate
2 at the universal mounting plate.
Speakers shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring continuity
via a shorting spring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting spring shall
also provide tamper resistance via an open circuit if the device is removed.
Speaker design shall isolate speaker components to reduce ground fault
3 incidents.
The speaker shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage that
are selected by rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound output
4 of 86 dB at 10 feet and shall incorporate an open back construction.
5 All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.

U. Advance Speaker Strobes

The Speaker Strobe appliance shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 1480 and be
approved for fire protective signaling systems. It shall be a dual-voltage
transformer speaker strobe capable of operation at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms.
The speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4,000 Hz and shall have an
operating temperature between 32°F and 120°F. It shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2
1 1/8-inch back box.
 A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker
strobe products. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall
terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, Advance speaker strobes
shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit output and
shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts (includes fire alarm panels with built
in sync). 12-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate
between 8.5 and 17.5 volts; 24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs
2 shall operate between 16.5 to 33 volts.
Speaker strobes shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring
continuity via a shorting spring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting
spring shall also provide tamper resistance via an open circuit if the device is
removed. Speaker strobe design shall isolate speaker components to reduce
3 ground fault incidents.
The speaker strobe shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage
that are selected by rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound
output of 86 dB at 10 feet and shall incorporate an open back construction.
The strobe shall consist of a xenon flash tube with associated lens/reflector
system and operate on either 12V or 24V. The strobe shall also feature
selectable candela output, providing options for 15 or 15/75 candela when
operating on 12V and 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 110, or 115 when operating on 24V.
The strobe shall comply with NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act
requirement for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s
4 entire operating voltage range.
5 All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.
Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971and be
6 fully synchronized.

V. Programmable Directional Sounders

1. Shall follow NFPA 72 2016 edition Clause A.[Link] recommendation.

2. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.
3. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special
tools, at a sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.
4. Shall be capable to broadcast pre programmed Voice Message.
5. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans.
6. Shall produce broad band directional sound with 20 Hz to 20 Khz
frequency band to guide occupants to safe exists even in complete darkness.
W. Addressable Portable Emergency Telephone Handset Jack

Portable emergency telephone handset jacks shall be flush mounted on

stainless steel plates as indicated on plans. Handset jacks shall be approved for
1 emergency telephone system application.
Insertion of a remote handset plug into a jack shall send a signal to the fire
command center which shall audibly and visually indicate the on-line condition,
2 and shall sound a ring indication in the handset.
The two-way emergency telephone system shall support thirty five (35)
3 handsets on line without degradation of the signal.
Remote Telephone Handset shall be capable of making paging announcement
4 across all the zones in the system.
X. Addressable Fixed Emergency Telephone Handset

The telephone cabinet shall be painted red and clearly labeled emergency
1 telephone. The cabinets shall be located where shown on drawings.
The handset cradle shall have a switch connection such that lifting the handset
off of the cradle shall send a signal to the fire command center which shall
2 audibly and visually indicate its on-line (off-hook) condition.
The two-way emergency telephone system shall support thirty five (35)
3 handsets on line (off hook) without degradation of the signal.
Remote Telephone Handset shall be capable of making paging announcement
4 across all the zones in the system.

Y. Batteries

The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for
not less than 48 hours in standby plus 2hours of alarm upon a normal AC
power failure.

The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required.

Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.

If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger

systems may be used.

PART 3.0 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state
codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major
A. equipment manufacturer.

All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in
finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall
not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If
construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect
B. smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote
annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be
C. surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush
mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches
D. (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.
3.2 CAUSE & EFFECT LOGIC

System shall be programmed as per the attached cause & effect logic.

3.3 TESTING

The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized

by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to
technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for
the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test
A. for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at
B. the FACP.
C. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.
D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal
E. actuates.
Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal
F. actuates.
G. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
H. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors
I. using the walk test.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect shall be
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing
J. of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.
When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's
manual shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is
intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually
addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality
K. and similar.

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION

At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of

the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in
A. every respect.

3.5 INSTRUCTION& TRAINING

 Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on
demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire
A. system including program changes and functions shall be provided.

The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall

B. provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation."

3.6 SUBMITTALS

a) Power calculations.
· Battery capacity calculations.
· Supervisory power requirements for all equipment.
· Alarm power requirements for all equipment.
· Justification showing power requirements of the system power supplies.
· Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs in worst case condition.
b) Complete manufacturer's catalogue data including supervisory power usage,
alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements.
c) Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all other
data as required to make an informed judgment regarding product suitability.
As a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following:
· Main system including all fire detection with main and secondary control
panels.
· Circuit interface panels including all modules.
· Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers.
· Equipment enclosures.
· Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, multi-criterion detectors,
heat detectors, analogue smoke detectors, alarm monitoring modules, and
supervised control modules.
· Audible and visual evacuation signals and devices.
· Software and firmware as required providing a complete functioning
system.
· Wiring.
· System driven remote annunciators.

· Interface module and wiring configuration from local system to Fire

Command System.

d) Submit copies of UL listing or FM approval data showing compatibility of the

proposed devices or appliances and the panels being provided.
e) Submit the following shop drawings.
· Floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory, indicating
appliances, and output control devices; including circuit interface panels,
enunciators, printers, Control panel location.
· Raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size
· Calculations and mathematical justification for speakers meet the code
required 15 dBA above ambient for audible warning signals.
· Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all
electrical connections to the system devices and panels.
· Complete single-line riser diagram showing all equipment and the size
type and number of all conductors.
f) Submit Method Statement for systems component wiring, installation,
testing, commissioning and operating.
g) Typical installation drawings
h) Complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of proposed
installation drawings shall be submitted.
i) Warranty all system components, devices, peripherals, wiring, for Three years
from date of practical completion Certificate.
j) Guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or
electrical defects for One years from date of practical completion Certificate.

Public Address/Voice Alarm System Design Scheme

Part I Design Requirements
Project Overview
[This chapter mainly describes the basic information and requirements for this
bid.]
System Design
The design for the Digital Public Address/Voice Alarm System should meet the
user and system requirements below. Its key features and design basis are as
described in the next chapters.
User Requirements
The broadcasting system uses the same device to play the background music,
business announcement and emergency broadcast. It has an emergency call
microphone in the fire control center for evacuating the crowds in specific
zones when accidence happens and a paging microphone in the broadcasting
center to broadcast announcements and search notices.
The background music, business announcement and emergency broadcast
share the same loudspeakers. In ordinary situation, the loudspeakers are for
playing background music and business announcement, but for emergency
broadcast instead during the fires.
The broadcasting devices located in the broadcasting center or the specified
location according to the user’s requirement. The placement of the devices
should meet the operating environment requirement and save up floor space.
The amplifier capacity should comply with national standards and be with
redundancy. Meanwhile, the emergency broadcast can achieve the linkage of
the adjacent layers. Users can select the layers to be linked.
System Design Requirements
Maturity
As the development of modern science and technology, all kinds of the
advanced technologies have been applied in the intelligent buildings to save
the labor costs, to improve the efficiency and to ensure the intelligence for the
modern buildings.

The modern technologies support the public address applications in the

intelligent buildings. The global mature and advanced technologies are critical
for designing the public address system, and only the broadcasting system
incorporating mature and industry-leading technology and high-technology
products can ensure the intelligence for buildings.
In the system design, advanced concepts, technologies and methods need to
be adopted; system structure, product designs and wiring easiness also need to
be considered.
Functionality and Reliability
Besides the technical advancement mentioned above, functional design,
system structure, system performance, manufacturing process and
after-sales support are also important as to ensure the reliability and
stability of the system operation, maximizing the mean error-free time.
A mature technical platform and the rigorous manufacturing process are
the bases of functions’ realization. During the runtime, system should
be able to discover and eliminate all the functional faults in time.
System administrators can easily access the failures and work logs.
Key Design Bases and Indices
Key Design Bases
XXX Bid Document
Architectural Plan
Civil Architectural Electrical Design Code (JGJ/T16-92)
Code for Engineering Design of Generic Cabling System for Building and
Campus (GB/T50311-2000)
Standard for Design of Intelligent Building (GB/T50314-2000)
Code for Design of Automatic Fire Alarm System (GBJ116-92)
Automatic control system for fire protection (GB16806-2006)
Technical Code for Public Address System Engineering (GB50526-2010)
Key Design Indices
Sound Field Intensity
The intensity of the sound field is close related to the background noise. In
terms of the noise criterion for different environments, the noise criterion in
general buildings is 25 ~45db except the parking lot with noise criterion around
55 ~56db. The uniformity of the sound field is the uniformity on the sound
pressure level, and its range of variation should better be around [Link]
intelligibility is the subjective assessment standard of the sound articulation.
The performance indices for the loudspeaker: the frequency response is the
key factor that affects the intelligibility. The frequency response of the ceiling
loudspeaker within 100Hz ~ 14 KHz is appropriate. The specific indices for the
various loudspeakers should accord to the frequency response of the amplifier,
which should be better than the loudspeaker’s. The selection and location for
the loudspeakers are mainly determined by factors like maximum sound
pressure level, sound field uniformity, transmission frequency characteristic
and space size. In terms of the technical standards, Indices of Acoustic
Characteristics for Sound Reinforcement System & Civil Architectural Electrical
Design Code, the system is designed by third level of the sound reinforcement
for the voice and music. The indices are as follows:
Vacant auditoria stable overall sound pressure level ≥85dB ( Within 250 ~
4000Hz average sound pressure level )
transmission frequency characteristic: 250 ~ 4000Hz, tolerance +4 ~ 10dB
Sound Field Non-uniformity ≤ 8dB
The sound pressure of the listening point on the vertical axis along the single
loudspeaker’s projecting direction can be calculated by:
LP=L0+10lgPS-20lgr
LP: auditory point sound pressure level(dB), L0: loud speaker sound pressure
level (dB SPL), PS: sound pressure power of sound source, also the loudspeaker
rated power (W), r: vertical distance of the speakers and the listening point
Background Music: The sound source location of the background system should
not be aware by the listeners. The goal for the design is that the tone quality of
the music is tender and clear. The design indices: the sound pressure inside is
uniform. The average sound pressure = noise level + (3~5) db. The frequency
band is 100 ~ 12000Hz, and the playback is straight.
Emergency broadcast: The emergency system is designed to make the listener
hear clear and correct sound. The design indices: The sound pressure inside is
uniform. The average sound pressure = 88 ~94 db. The frequency band is 100 ~
6000Hz and the playback is straight.
As described above, the noise level can determine the average sound pressure
for this design: Background music sound pressure = 60 ~ 70 dB, and Emergency
broadcast sound pressure = 88 ~94dB.
Power Amplifier
P=K1·K2·ΣP0
P —Total electric power amplifier device output (W); P0— max. electric power
of Ki·Pi when every branch broadcasts at the same time
Pi— the speakers rated capacity of the i-th branch; Ki— sync coefficient of the
i-th branch
Service broadcasting programs, Ki=0.2~0.4; Background music system, Ki=
0.5~0.6
The business of broadcasting, Ki= 0.7~0.8; Fire accident broadcasting, Ki= 1.0
(the maximum electric power broadcast should be in line with the national
standards)
K1—Line attenuation compensation coefficient: When line attenuation is 1db,
K1 is 1.26; line attenuation is 2db, K1 is 1.58
K2— the aging factor, 1.2~1.
System Function
System Design Composition and Principle
The system has placed broadcasting devices in every plant room. The
distributed control device (DCD) is integrated with many functions and
supports the connection via Ethernet. It has 8 loudspeaker output circuits to
connect the loudspeaker in zones and 4 network connection interfaces to
connect to 4 network paging control panel or Ethernet. Each DCD can connect
up to 4 amplifier channels. The device has integrated amplifier switching matrix
to support the redundancy switching and the general dry contact input/output
interface to connect the external audio sources and dry contact interface of the
linkage fire system. It has a built-in 1G memory to store the audios such as
digital voice messages and the alarm tone of the emergency broadcast and to
store log files. This device can operate independently without the PC. It
encompasses the functions like the audio playing, zone control, fault
monitoring, log recording, volume control and amplifier switchover.

The control device for the system customized Paging Station. It has the LCD
touch screen for operations, like zone selecting, calling, audio sourcing
selecting, and emergency broadcast, monitoring and internal communication.
The functions of the Programmable network paging console can be configured
using the configuration software.
Key Features
Distributed Control
This distributed design for the system is based on the building structure to
facilitate the connection of the loudspeakers in several nearby zones, which
will make the control of the loudspeakers easier. The selected system devices
should use the TCP/IP technologies and build on the standard network
platform to ensure the extensibility, compatibility for multiple technology
platforms and advancement of the system.
Faults detection and Isolation
The Faults detection function for the broadcasting system can automatically
examine the host system, power amplifier, power source, communication, and
detect the open circuit, short circuit and grounding fault to generate the fault
alarm and log.
When the grounding fault or short circuit occurs, the amplifier or the main
controller of the system should isolate the circuit to ensure the operation of
the main devices and normal circuits.
Background Music Audio Source
The broadcasting system can use audio sources from devices such as the CD,
radio and MP3 to provide the zones with different audio sources, which can
meet the various requirements for different zones. In the tolerant power
range, different zones using the same audio source can share an amplifier,
reducing the system cost. The background music inputs methods are multiple:
both network and local inputs are allowed.
Service Broadcasting
The paging microphone allows users to make paging and broadcast search
notices by zone. The paging microphone has a color LCD touch screen. Users
can configure the functions directly on the screen. Users can select the zone
and audio source, adjust the volume, and enable the emergency broadcast by
pressing the button on it. Paging microphones can intercommunicate. 255
broadcast priorities levels available. When the connected distributed control
unit is out of order, a paging microphone can continue the intercommunication
with other microphones in the network and proceed the remote broadcasting
configuration on other control units.
Time Synchronization
Within the system, the controller can specify any main device as the main time
source, or choose a third party system to be the time source. Other devices
synchronize their time with the main time source to make sure the time is
consistent in the system.
Timed Broadcast
The timed broadcast function of the broadcasting system allows users to set
the periods for playing different music or service broadcasts in different zones.
Emergency broadcast
The broadcasting system can be linkage of the fire system to achieve the alarm
function in the adjacent layers. The layers for linkage can be configured with
the software as the requirements. Users can record the voice message for the
emergency broadcast and save it in the host system. The emergency broadcast
can start automatically (when linkage of the fire system) and manually. The
broadcasting system has its own 1 PPT emergency microphone, which could be
used to play emergency broadcasts and evacuate the crowds in specific zones.
When the fire alarm rings, the system can display the fires in planar graph and
show the fire zones. According to the fire status, users can call the emergency
microphone to make the fire zones enter alarm and evacuation two modes.
Priority
The broadcasting system allows users to set the priorities. Generally, the
priority for the broadcast is in the order: Emergency Broadcast > Service
Broadcast >Background Music, and for the microphone is Emergency
Microphone > Service Broadcast Microphone.
Automatic Amplifier Shift
The system has standby amplifiers. When a main amplifier fails to function, the
standby amplifier replaces it automatically. After the main amplifier recovers,
the system will use it instead of the standby amplifier in an automatic way.
Broadcast Record
The controller can record sufficient voice message (up to 500Mb), and its
contents can be customized. The voice message contains the emergency
broadcasts for fires, such as evacuation and all-clear information, which are
played by the digital speech synthesis system automatically (linkage of the fire
alarm system) or manually. Four languages for the voice message are available.
Users can select one of the languages to record the information.
Internal Communication
The call stations can communicate with each other using the simple
communication functions.
The paging microphone in the broadcasting center has a color LCD touch
screen. Users can configure the functions according to the actual requirements.
The call station’s calling zone can be authorized. Each call station can call the
local authorized zones. Several call stations can call the same zone, and one call
station can call the zones of other call stations.
Background Music Broadcast
The background music broadcasting functions and local audio sources can be
specified in different zones. The administrator can configure the background
music according to the time and occasion. The system will automatically switch
to the emergency broadcast under emergency.
Program Source
The broadcasting control center has various audio sources, including the
professional digital players for background music, CD, FM/AM tuner, remote
control microphone for zone calling.

Log
The system can record the device fault log and operation log. Users can search
information in the logs using time, devices, operators and log types as search
criteria.
Distributed Call Station
The distributed call station can call the specified zones. The call station has
remote control function, which can control emergency broadcast, zone audio
sources and external devices.
Automatic Volume Control
The volume of the system can adjust automatically responding to different
levels of environment noise in the crowded areas.
Local & Remote Monitoring
Users can monitor audio sources status via local distributed control units and
remote call stations.
Emergency broadcast
Emergency broadcast Requirement
- Forced Switchover (Auto/Manual ): Once the emergency broadcast is
triggered by a remote control microphone or other external devices (fire alarm
system), the other functions (like background music and general broadcast) will
be paused, but the system will play the recorded voice message (alarm and
evacuation information) for fire emergency or the information from the
emergency microphone until the all-clear.
- The system will switch to emergency broadcast in 3 seconds.
- The signal tones and voice messages (alarm and evacuation information)
of the Emergency broadcast system are stored on the voice storage flash or SD
card, which will not be ageing or lost. Users can play them in all zones.
- Emergency broadcast system should have system testing function as a
standard configuration. The testing for the system can enable the operator to
ensure the normal operation for the system all the time. The testing of
emergency broadcast should be enabled via the software instead of playing the
actual emergency broadcasts and causing public’s panic.
- Emergency broadcast system should have two pre-recorded emergency
broadcast messages. The system should be able to edit and record the alarm
and evacuation message. The priorities of the emergency broadcast can be
programmed. DSM should be with a PTT emergency microphone, with which
operators can announce real-time evacuation notices when emergency
happens.
- Users can listen to stored or audios about to play to avoid playback error
message which may lead to crowd panic.
- Language kinds should meet the user’s requirements. There should be
spaces left for the tags to facilitate users to stick related prompts for
management.
- System can automatically record voice messages sent by emergency
microphone. Users can listen to and broadcast the voice message.
- The linkage signals of the emergency broadcast uses the volt-free
contact. All signals are from the fire control center. The number of the cables is
the same as the fire control centers number.
- Can achieve the linkage of the adjacent layers. Users can select the layers
to be linked via software configuration.
- The loudspeakers allow the 3-wire forced volume control switchover.
Circuit Detection
It is able to detect every zone’s status to ensure the working order of the
circuits and report faults in time. When a short-circuit error takes place, the
device isolates the zone where error happens to protect the amplifiers and to
cut off its impact on other zones.
Part II Solution
Device Selection
The system should be based on the TCP/IP network technologies with high
level of integration and flexible configuration to meet various requirements. It
is designed for the emergency broadcast and background music application
enabling fire emergency broadcast functions like automatic fire warning, voice
message presetting, emergency calling, emergency call recording and circuit
monitoring, and service broadcasting functions like zone background music
broadcasting, zone call broadcasting, timed music broadcasting and
monitoring. The device is accordance with the Automatic Control System for
Fire Protection (GB16806) and Standard EN 54-16.
With public address and voice alarm system integrated into one, the system
should solve the duplication of investment and security risks and other
problems caused by two individual systems. The distributed intelligent systems
of the should be capable of accessing the 10/100M Ethernet network and
multiple audio sources from the network. It supports connections in the
Ethernet and the networking for several other control systems to perform
centralized and distributed management via software. This product should be
suitable for medium-scale and large-scale buildings.

Technical Characteristics
High Integration
The controller should be able to integrate audio source storage, network audio
reception, voice broadcasting, audio matrix, volume control, monitoring,
troubleshooting and main/standby amplifier switch functions together.
Safety
The system should be GB16806/EN54-16 compliant and can work in severe
environment. It can be used to broadcast in case of emergency to disperse and
evacuate people. It is a great guarantee for people’s life security
Ethernet Based Extension
The central controller should be able to connect over the Ethernet without any
external device. The configurable Network Paging Microphone could be placed
anywhere in the Ethernet, which will enable the following :
The method of distributed installation can save the cost of wiring.
If the band width is sufficient, it can use current internal network.
Provide plentiful network audio sources.
Control the local or global broadcasting by the manner of permissions.
Easy to upgrade.
Multitask Processing Mechanism
To simplify the operations, the system adopts multitask processing mechanism,
thus it can process multiple tasks and make it possible to broadcast multiple
audio source and broadcast in multiple zones.
Multiple Audio Sources Support
The system supports the audio sources from emergency microphone, network
audio, ancillary line input, build-in audio/music files and web microphones.
SONIC Network Digital Audio Transmission Technology
With SONIC, multiple digital audio signals, including PC-connected
microphones, external audio files, DSM local audio files, etc., can be
transmitted through the network, realizing the audio input diversity and output
parallelism. 10M/100M Standard Ethernet is adopted as the transmission
media. If the band width is sufficient, the devices can use and share the existing
network with other systems, reducing costs on network laying.
Prioritized Control
The system supports 255 priorities. Users can configure it in any way they want
and realize all kinds of prioritized broadcasting controlling.
Automatic Volume Control Function
In places of crowded people and loud noises, users can install a noise detector,
which can help control the broadcasting volume automatically to ensure
sound’s intelligibility..
Local and Network Monitoring Function
With the built-in loudspeaker of controller or Configurable Network Paging
Console, users can monitor each zone’s broadcasting. The monitoring volume
can be adjusted.
Touch screen
Programmable network paging console (NPC) is equipped with a touch screen.
Users can operate on the touch screen to configure multi-zones settings
without the need to extend hardware key modules, saving floor space on the
desktop.
Troubleshooting Feature
The ASD troubleshooting technology can support the system to automatically
detect the failure of the main power, standby power, amplifier circuit, amplifier
protection/power, software, communications and loudspeakers etc. It can also
locate the failure for maintainers to repair or replace the fault units.
Loudspeaker Circuit Detection
The SIM loudspeaker circuit detecting technology helps monitor loudspeaker
circuits’ statuses. When short-circuit or open-circuit faults are found, the
device will send a warning automatically. The software can display all the
circuit faults for maintenance’s convenience. Usually a loudspeaker’s
short-circuit fault will activate the amplifier protection, affecting the working
order in other zones. SIM solves this problem by automatically isolate the
short-circuited zone where fault is found.
Matrix Allocation Function
This system includes the audio source matrix and power matrix to provide two
kinds of work mode: low-cost power zones, and amplifiers & zones, which can
meet the requirement for low-cost applications or high power zones.
RiskFree auto-backup technology focuses on realizing the main units’, including
servers’ and amplifiers’, backup and switchover functions. A server machine is
paired up with a standby one, while a standby amplifier can serve as the
backup machine of one, two or three main amplifiers. When faults are
detected on the main machines, the system will switch over to the standby
one.

Input/output Triggering
This system has input/output interfaces which can be triggered by dry contacts.
Engineer staffs can configure the contact input to achieve the broadcasting
control by the external device (linkage of the fire system). The contact output
can be used to control the external devices for the volume, forced switchover
and so on. The contact output interface can be linked of the broadcasting
operations.
Voice Alarm
This system is designed in accordance with the EN54-16 Standard and national
standard GB16806. It is full-featured for the fire alarm. When the fire occurs,
the system will play the preset voice information. Then it can play the
evacuation information for the zones with fires and the fire alarms for the
nearby zones. The system can set several kinds of language for voice
information, which can be played using the operation panel.
Broadcast Delay
Users can configure the time delay function in the broadcasting system. After
making broadcasts, users need to wait for the time delay set previously, then
the pre-recorded program will be played. This function can be utilized as in the
following situation: When fire occurs, the system will pause for the
administrator to confirm the fire alarm signal, and then play the emergency
broadcasts. It can avoid crowd panic results from mis-operations.
OneClick Technology
To increase operation’s convenience, OneClick technology is developed with
which broadcasting can be started by clicking only one key. The operation
shortcut can be configured with system management software and network
paging console.
Internal Communication
The Programmable network paging console should have built-in loudspeakers
and microphones for internal communication. Users need to configure this
function before using it.
CLASS-D Amplifier saves the energy with high efficiency.
Channel number can be 1, 2 or 4
100V or 70V output is used for each channel.
Support balanced input or unbalanced audio input mode.
Cooling mode is forced air-cooling mode.
Able to limit output voltage automatically.
Flexible Configuration
This system allows users to customize the configurations flexibly using the
specific software. The engineering technicians and maintainers can configure
the built-in audio sources, keys’ functions, troubleshooting, audio source play
modes, broadcasting priorities and contact input/output and other customized
operations the OneClick functions. With careful configurations, the system can
meet the needs of both background music broadcasting and emergency
alarms. The configuration software for this system is used to configure the
hardware. The default configuration for the device contains only the basic
functions. Users need to work on each settings, including basic parameters,
troubleshooting, broadcast preset and key events and so forth.

Configuration Software features:

Project File Management
It includes:
- Create project, save project, open project, and check the latest project
file;
- Manage the subsystem and configuration files
Property Setting
The property setting is to set the basic property and broadcasting functions.
The basic property settings include the zone settings, DSM settings and paging
station settings.
Broadcasting Setting
The broadcasting function allows users to set the event- triggered,
time-triggered and fire alarm broadcasting.
Output Configuration
After the error checking and building, system can generate the configuration
files according to the configured project files.
Audio Source Conversion
It allows users to convert the audio files according to the sampling rate,
digitalizing bit and channel number into the audio files in specified formats for
the system.
System Management Software
The system management software can run on the Windows XP/Windows Vista/
Windows 7 operation system. It can communicate with the system via the
Ethernet. The operation is as simple as below:
System Configuration
- Configure the components and functions of the system management
software.
- Configure the devices for the server.
- Configure the electronic map or operation interface.
- Configure audio sources and preset broadcasting operations.
- Drag the maps, icons and buttons to modify the layout on the server
operation interface.
- Configure the managing scope and authorities for software on the client
end.
User Management
It can add, edit and delete users and manage access control of the users.
Broadcasting Control
The broadcasting control function allows users to manage all the broadcasting
businesses and to manage the broadcasting management client ends.
System State Management
The software can obtain broadcasting states of each device in the system. The
buttons and icons representing devices or zones will be green when all
functions are normal, and will turn red when fire occurs.
System Warning
System Warning Function allows for centralized management of device failure
states in the system, and recording the fault log automatically in the log
module. When the system detects failure, the interface of the system
management software will give out audible & visual alarm. Failed device unit is
yellow. Users can accurately locate the failure unit using the interface of the
system management software.
Log Management
System can record and store all system operations histories and failure events
for future analysis. Work log and failure log will be stored in separate memories
and cannot be deleted manually. Only the logs of the latest one year will be
stored. Users can query the logs according to time, workgroup, device, etc. and
export the result logs.
Voice Synthesis
The system management software provides the interfaces for the third party
voice synthesis software. It can convert the text words into voice for playing.
Audio Management
It allows users to perform centralized management of the audio files on the
server, and to play them on the network. The audio management function can
convert the audio source files in different format into the specified formats of
the system. It can put the audio files to the specified broadcasting zones by
configuring the preset broadcasting operation.
Device Description
Digital Integrated System Manager / controller
The Digital Integrated System Manager is hereinafter referred to as the DSM.
The DSM is control equipment in the system designed for extending the
number of loudspeaker zones, and can support multiple sound source files for
broadcasting. The system integrates with functions such as the sound source
file storage system, the network audio broadcasting system, the loudspeaker
zone control system, and the system for monitoring and diagnosing faults.
The DSM offers various features, which are listed below:
Supports the manual selection of sound source files, zone buttons, and can be
directly operated.
Supports emergency microphone input for emergency broadcast in the event
of, for example, a fire evacuation.
Includes different indicator lights that identify system running states.
Performs remote paging and broadcasting operation through the Configurable
Network Paging Console.
Includes 8 zone outputs. The number of zones can be configured through the
software.
4 auxiliary inputs that can connect to external sound source equipment such as
a CD player or tuner
4 auto volume control input ports that can set the phantom power supply and
gain of each input.
Auto loudspeaker circuits’ short-circuit and open-circuit detection.
 A fuse protects the main power supply. In the case of a power supply short
circuit within the DSM, the system automatically disconnects the main power
supply.
Built-in loudspeaker that can monitor the zones and sound sources, as well as
monitor the network audio through the paging station.
Contains 1GB of built-in flash memory that can store recorded voice files so as
to fulfill functions such as voice information broadcasting and voice synthesis
and to store LOG files
Can simultaneously broadcast four types of sound sources, such as voice audio
sources and external input or network audio sources.
Can automatically record operation and fault logs, and can store up to 10,000
logs of each log type (operation and fault log types).
Supports switching between the main and backup power amplifiers, and is
capable of configuring the standby mode.
Contains a self-test function.
Supports automatic fault diagnosis.
Supports broadcasting volume adjustment.
Can define the zone and sound source functions. Button function description
labels are also easy to install.
An audio matrix enables broadcasting any audio source in any zone.
Supports fire emergency broadcast mode so as to improve personnel
evacuation efficiency in case of an emergency.
Supports broadcasting designated recorded voice audio at a designated time so
as to allow for unattended broadcasting.
Capable of system extension through an Ethernet network.

Parameter Value
Power Supply
Main power supply ~100-240V，50/60Hz
Backup power
DC 21.5V-28.5V
supply
Main power fuse T2AL 250V
Max. input power 120 W
Rated power 50 W
Audio Input
Auxiliary input 0dB
Input impedance 20 kΩ
Frequency response 60Hz-16KHz
PTT microphone
-51dB
input
SNR >85dB
Audio Output
Audio output
4个
channels
Output signal 0dB
Record output 0dB
AVC Input
Channels 4个
Input signal -50dB/0dB, configured by switch
Input impedance 20KΩ
Phantom power DC 24V, configured by switch
Frequency response 60Hz-16KHz
SNR >65dB
Loudspeaker Circuit
Output channels 8, with circuit fault detection function
Max. output load
250W
power
Trigger Input /
Output
Trigger input ports 8
Trigger output ports 8 (NO, NC and COM)
Max. working
AC 250V/DC 30V
voltage
Max. working
2.5A
current
Others
Monitoring
10W/8W
loudspeaker
Ethernet speed 10M/100M
Ethernet interface
4
number
Storage space 1GB
Work Condition
Humidity < 95%, without condensing
Working
-10°C~+55°C
temperature
Storage temperature -40°C~+70°C
Specification
Dimension (W×H×D) 482 mm×88 mm ×420mm
Mount dimension
580mm×235mm ×552mm
(W×H×D)
Net weight 9.3Kg
Gross weight 12.5Kg

Pure Final Stage Power Amplifier

Pure final stage power amplifier 360W / 460W can be used in this system,
which has the following characteristics:
Real-time display of the temperature and volumes on the LCD;
Build-in RCA and XLR ports with high-quality balanced input/output interfaces
specially added;
100V or 70V constant-pressure output and 4-16Ω constant-impedance;
 Output volumes can be digitally adjusted. It has 32 digital volume levels and
can be adjusted by the two volume keys.
5.8 Unit LED display facilitates you to examine the device status.
Perfect output short circuit protection and over-temperature protection;
Automatic press limit control for long-time over loading output;
Cool fan can be warm booted. The complete new design of the build-in short
air duct cooling system structure for amplifiers can ensure the high stability
performance.
Remote fault reset function such as overloading or short circuit protection.
Parameters 500W
Rated output power 1X500W
Main power supply
AC 220V -15%~+10% 50~60Hz
voltage
Backup power
AC 220V -15%~+10% 50~60Hz
supply voltage

Main power supply

T10AL 250V
fuse

Loudspeaker output 100V / 70V

Frequency response 70~15KHz (+1dB ~ -3dB)

Input sensitivity and
1.414VRMS & 20K ohm
impedance
Output
100V/40ohm, 70V/19.6ohm
voltage/impedance
Signal-to-noise ratio
90dB
(SNR)
Nonlinear distortion  0.1% (1KHz, 1/3 rated output power)
Number of channels 1
Environment
 95%, without condensing
humidity
Working
0 to +40C
temperature

Storage temperature -10C to +55C

Product dimensions
(width × height × 88mm × 440mm × 440mm
depth)

Configurable Network Paging Console

The Configurable Network Paging Console is hereinafter referred to as the
“NPC”
 The network paging microphone (NPC) connects to the system and related
devices to transmit audio and control information through the Ethernet
network. The NPC is used for paging, controlling broadcasts, monitoring zones,
and for using the bidirectional intercom function.
The NPC has the following characteristics:
Lightweight and innovative patent outward design. Support embedded desktop
installation
4.3-inch color LCD touch screen. Can display system status and be operated for
zones and groups’ division or global paging and broadcast control
Simple and intuitive user interface
Can connect with up to 20 units. Button numbers can be added via software
configuration
Built-in monitor loudspeakers. Can utilize functions like zone monitoring and
two-way intercom between stations.
Digital audio processing to avoid acoustic fidelity distortion
Can intercommunicate with other paging microphones and DSM in the network
even when the connected DSM is not running
3 shortcut buttons: microphone talk mode switch, select all function and
emergency broadcast

Parameters Values
Power supply
voltage DC 12V
AUX input 0 dB
AUX input
impedance 10 KW

Frequency response 60 Hz – 16 KHz (local input signal)

Microphone input -51 dB
Audio output 0 dB
Monitoring
loudspeaker 2 W/8 W
Monitoring sound Higher than 65 dB and lower than 115 dB (1 m in front of where the audio is
pressure level being output)
Operating
temperature -10 °C to +55 °C

Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C

Humidity  95%, without condensation

Loudspeakers
Ceiling Loudspeaker
6W Ceiling speaker with metal grille and 6/3/1.5W taps
Parameters Values
Max power 9W
Rated power 6W
Power taps @ 100V 6W / 3W / 1.5W
Sound pressure level
at 6W/1W
(4kHz,1m) 96dB / 88 dB
Frequency range
(-10dB) 80 Hz -20 kHz
Dispersion angle
(1kHz/-6dB) 160°
Rated input voltage 100 V / 70 V
Rated impedance 1.7 kΩ / 3.3 kΩ
Connection Plastic terminal blocks
Dimensions(Φ x H) Φ180 mm x 55 mm
Hole cut-out size 150 mm
Size of speaker 5”
Weight 0.71 kg
Color White (RAL 9010)
Weight of Magnet 117 g
Wall Mount Speaker
6W Wall mount speaker with 6/3W taps

Rated power 6W
Power taps @ 100V 6W/3W
Sound pressure level
at 6W/1W
(1kHz,1m) 96 dB / 88 dB
Frequency range
(-10dB) 110 Hz -13 kHz
Rated impedance 1.7 kΩ / 3.3 kΩ
Connection Cable
Dimensions (W x H x
D) 260 x180 x 120 mm
Weight 1.08 kg
Color White (RAL 9010)
Weight of Magnet 115 g

Horn Loudspeaker
15W Horn Loudspeaker with IP66 protection
Max power 25 W
Rated power 15 W
Power taps @ 100V 15 W / 7.5 W
Sound pressure level
at 6W/1W
(1kHz,1m) 110.3 dB / 98.5 dB
Frequency range
(-10dB) 500 Hz - 5 kHz
Dispersion angle
(1kHz/-6dB) 140°
Rated input voltage 100 V / 70 V
Rated impedance 500 Ω / 1 kΩ
Connection Cable
Dimensions
(diameter x height) 225 X 165 X 240mm
Weight 1.38 kg
Color White (RAL 9010)
Case material ABS

Sound projection speaker

20W Unidirectional Sound projector with IP55 protection

Parameters Values
Max power 30 W
Rated power 20 W
Power taps @ 100V 20/10/5W
Sound pressure level
at 6W/1W
(1kHz,4m) 106 dB / 94 dB
Frequency range
(-10dB) 150 Hz -15 kHz
Rated input voltage 100 V / 70 V
Rated impedance 500 Ω / 1 kΩ / 2 kΩ
Connection Plastic terminal
Dimensions (W x H x
D) 170 x170 x 63 mm
Size of speaker 6.5 “
Weight 1.28 kg
Color White
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

Technical Specification of 4 Door 4 Reader Controller

S. No. Specification Compliance

1 Applications Access Control System

2 CPU ARM 32 Bit RISC Processor

3 Memory Up to 4GB (8 MB Flash)

4 No. of Doors 4

5 No. of Readers 4

6 Events/Transactions Up to 4,00,000

7 No. Users Up to 100000

8 Web Server Available

9 Door Interlocking/Man Trap Available

10 Global APB Available

11 SNMP Alerts Available

12 MODBUS Protocol Support Available

13 AC Fail/Low Battery Alert Available

14 Reader Interface Weigand (26 bit to 56 bit)

12 inputs (4- Door Status, 4- Egress, 1- Fire & 1- intrusion

15
Input and 2 Extra input)

16 Output 12 outputs (4 - DOTL, 4 – Lock, 4 auxiliary output)

17 Communications Port TCP/IP,RS485

18 Fire Integration Yes

 19 Intrusion Integration Yes

20 LCD 16X2 LCD Display

21 Keypad 4X3 Key with soft keypad

22 Baud Rate 9600bps (Default)

23 Controller ID Up to 10,000

24 Language English

25 Power Supply 12 V DC/ 5A

26 Enclosure Industry Standard Metal Enclosure

27 Din Rail (Without Metal Enclosure)

Mounting
28 Wall mount (With Metal Enclosure)

29 Facility Code Available

30 Time Zone / Access Levels 63 + 1 (Free Time Zone)/Unlimited

31 Time Zone Slots 4 slots per Day

32 Anti-Passback Hard, Soft, Escort (Reader Wise),Global

33 Holiday Settings 42

Technical Specification of 2 Door 2 Reader Controller

S. No. Specification Compliance

1 Applications Access Control System

2 CPU ARM 32 Bit RISC Processor

3 Memory Up to 4GB (8 MB Flash)

4 No. of Doors 2

5 No. of Readers 2

6 Events/Transactions Up to 4,00,000

7 No. Users Up to 100000

8 Web Server Available

9 Door Interlocking/Man Trap Available

10 Global APB Available

11 SNMP Alerts Available

12 MODBUS Protocol Support Available

13 AC Fail/Low Battery Alert Available

14 Reader Interface Weigand (26 bit to 56 bit)

12 inputs (2- Door Status, 2- Egress, 1- Fire & 1- intrusion

15
Input and 2 Extra input)

16 Output 12 outputs (2 - DOTL, 2 – Lock, 4 auxiliary output)

17 Communications Port TCP/IP,RS485

18 Fire Integration Yes

19 Intrusion Integration Yes

20 LCD 16X2 LCD Display

21 Keypad 4X3 Key with soft keypad

22 Baud Rate 9600bps (Default)

23 Controller ID Up to 10,000

24 Language English

25 Power Supply 12 V DC/ 5A

26 Enclosure Industry Standard Metal Enclosure

27 Din Rail (Without Metal Enclosure)

Mounting
28 Wall mount (With Metal Enclosure)

29 Facility Code Available

30 Time Zone / Access Levels 63 + 1 (Free Time Zone)/Unlimited

31 Time Zone Slots 4 slots per Day

 32 Anti-Passback Hard, Soft, Escort (Reader Wise),Global

33 Holiday Settings 42

Technical Specification of Web based Modular Access Management and Time Attendance software

[Link] Specification Compliance

Cloud Compatible enterprise level Web based Modular Access Management and Time
Attendance software with SQL Database especially designed to cater small, medium and large
1 organizations.

Single GUI Plateform with complete modular software with provision to integrate with
2 different application ie; Access Control, VMS, Canteen, Alarm Management, etc.

It comprises with all masters, basic access control software, and basic attendance software
3 and enrollment module.

Advance access control management software module with all the access control features i.e.;
4 Time Zone, Access Level, Anti passback, Holiday restrictions, employee black list, etc.

Attendance management software module with all time attendance features i.e. Shift
management, Leave management, attendance policy e.g. late coming, early going, continues
5 absent, Overtime, Compensatory off, outdoor entry, etc.

Employee Self Service - login module for Employee/HOD/MANAGER where they can view their
attendance; they can apply for leave/manual punch/tour entry/outdoor entry though internet
with their login ID & password. Same way manager can online approve all application sent by
6 employee.

User Enrollment interface module for finger/card enrollment of users. BIOmini &
7 smartPERSONALIZER can be connected to this module for user enrollment.

Comprehensive Email and SMS module for smartCOMMANDCONTROL to send various SMS &
8 Email on the base of different events in Access Control & Time Attendance system.

Role wise module ie; Employee Self service - for View Attandence, for applying Leave,Manual
9 Punch,out door entry, tour entry,Condone entry,compensation off & Overtime

HOD Login for view their attendance and apply for leave,manul punch,etc. apart from
10 provision to approve all the application of their team mate

HR/Admin/Location Admin/Company Login for all the configuration/settings of attendance

11 rules,leave mangement, shift management and others parameters
 It should support Multi company, multi location, multi department, multi login with different
12 rights, muti hierarchy of employee

User wise different type of dashboard with Inclusive summary on dashboard,real time data
display on dashboard, Pending Request Summary,Leave summary on Dash board, Employee
13 Count as per login rights

Configurable Employee Hierarchy with Multiple employee categories ,multiple Employee Type,
14 different Employee Status and Employee Photograph with other details

Should have complete shift management ie; auto shift, flexi shift, night shift with advance level
15 of automatic shift roaster which will take care of complex shift management

Should have complete Leave management ie; Leave definition, define leave rules,set leave
16 opening balance, leave carryforward & leave application/approval

Should have provision to make mass attendance entry/ application/approval in case of most of
17 the employees are coming late or, going early ie; Train Strike, Bus Strike,etc.

Should support maker & checker facility - the local administrator should able to add the users
but he should not able to authenticate/approve the User, Approval right of the added user
18 should be with main Administrator

19 Different type of Anti passback - Hard,Soft, user wise & controller wise

20 Holiday restriction (Reader Wise)

21 Blacklist of employee

22 Duress Authentications

23 Dual Authentications

24 Configurable delay time for two successive punch from same

Controller communication status display with indication of Green/Red button denotes device
25 is online or, offline

26 Displaying Short Messages setting to display on device

27 Centralize fingerprint Template Management

28 Bulk upload of cards

29 Support Maximum 9,999 controller

30 Configurable Auto/Manual/Scheduled Data Downloading

31 Controller Reset command

 32 Block Admin/User of controller

33 Device Configuration – Push/Pull

34 Door Open Time Configuration

35 Door Auto Relock configuration

36 Reader open Time can be define

37 Facility Code supported

38 Audit Log

39 Event Wise mail And SMS can be sent

40 Central Date & time Synchronization

41 User wise/Controller wise Latest swipe display

42 100+ Useful different type of MIS reports

43 Master data import facility & data export facility

44 Dedicated output reports for Payroll integration

In 20+ format reports should be generated ie; PDF, MS Xps, MS Power point, HTML, Mht
Web,Archive, Text, rich Text, Word 2007, Open document Writer, Excel, Excel Xml, Excel 2007,
45 Open Document Calc, CSV, Dbase, Xml, BMP, Gif,Jpeg, Pcx, Png, Tiff, Metafile

Email & SMS can be sent on every configured event ie; Leave Application/approval, Manaual
Punch Application/Approval,Outdoor Application/Approval, Tour Application/Approval,
46 Condone Application/Approval

47 Software should have Android based Mobile apps for Employee Self Service module

48 Employee Self Service module on Android based Smart Phone

Easy Employee tracking as outdoor Employee Attendance should marked with their GPS
49 Location

50 Leave Application, Manual Punch, Outdoor/Tour entry through Mobile Apps

51 Condone Entry through Android based mobile Apps

52 Employee can mark Offline attendance (If No Network) through Mobile Apps

Technical Specification of Smart Card Reader

 [Link]. Specification Compliance

1 Read Range 4 -9 cms

2 Data Read CSN/Sector

3 Type Smart Card (Mifare Classic)

4 Transmit Frequency 13.56 MHz

5 Card (Transponder ) Mifare® Series (ISO14443-A)

6 Card Read Time 0.1 sec

7 Output Interface Wiegand Format( 32 bits)

8 LED Indicator Bi color LED

9 Power supply 12 V DC @ 100mA

10 Dimensions 80W X 83 H X 21 D

11 Material ABS Plastic

12 Color Black

13 Cable Specs (Recommended) 5 core, 7/36 shielded cable

14 Cable Distance from Controller: 80m (Wiegand)

15 Card should be read in1 sec

A Wiegand output that easily interfaces with most existing Wiegand protocol access control
16 panels.

17 Compact and Elegant. Easily installed on walls and doors.

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

[Link] Item Approved Make

1 Cat6 UTP cables & Information outlet (I/O) Belden/Siemon/Panduit/Der Wiser

2 Cat 6 Jack Panel Belden/Siemon/Panduit/Der Wiser

3 CAT 6 patch cords Belden/Siemon/Panduit/Der Wiser

4 Face Plate Belden/Siemon/Panduit/Der Wiser

5 Fiber Equipment (Cable, Patch Cord & LIU .) Belden/Siemon/Panduit/Der Wiser

6 42U & 15U wall mount rack Poweride/MTS/Rittal/APC/APW

7 CCTV cameras Allgovision/ Impulse / Avigilon / Pelco/ Axis

8 NVR Allgovision/ Impulse / Avigilon / Pelco/ Axis

9 24 Port PoE Switch & SFP Switch Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

10 04 & 08 Port Industrial Grade PoE Switch Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

11 Workstations Dell / HP / IBM / Lenovo

12 FHD LED Display Panasonic/ Sony/ Samsung / LG

13 Core LAN Switch Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

14 Distribution LAN Switch Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

15 24 Port Access LAN Switch Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

16 IP-PBX SYSTEM & IP Phones Tadiran/Cisco /Polycom/Juniper/Cambium

17 Wi-Fi Cisco/ Impulse / Juniper / Extreme/ Arista

18 Web Security Zscaler / Checkpoint / Palo Alto / Cisco/Juniper

19 Fire alarm Systems Ansul / Edwards / Notifier/ Wissenschaftler / Rux

20 PA Systems Actis / Honeywell/ Bosch Praesedio

21 Speaker Bosch / Honeywell /System Sensor/ Ateis

22 ITEM (for asset inventory management) Nexxus / Siemens / Torque

23 Fire Cable Polycab/RR Kabel/Paramount/Parasheild

24 Speaker Cable Polycab / Incoll /Skyton /Falcon / RR Kabel

25 Access Control System Cardex / Lenel / Impulse / Bosch / Smart i

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM(BMS)

 1. GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and
operating Building Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as
required & as mentioned inDBR.
B. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on
the plans, that is required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be
provided without additional cost to theCPWD.
C. CLIENT/ CPWD shall be the named license holder of all software associated with
any and all incremental work on theproject(s).

1.2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. The entire Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating via BACNET/
LonMark/Lon Talk communication protocols to a Network Area Controller (NAC) /
Router. Building Management System products shall be manufactured as per
LonWorks products must be approved in writing by the consulting Engineer and be
submitted for approval ten (10) days prior to the date of the bidsubmittal.
B. The entire Integrated Control and Monitor Management System (IBMS) shall be
comprise of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers
communicating on an open protocol communication network to a host computer
within the facility (when specified) and communicating via the Internet to a host
computer in a remote location. The IBMS shall communicate to third party systems
such as Chillers, Boilers,Air-
Handling Systems, Energy metering systems, Lighting Management System & other energy management systems, Fire-Life
safetysystems
and other building management related devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities.

C. The IBMS framework shall utilize JAVA based automation products and services
with built-in Internet connectivity to a broad range of distribution partners in the
building automation, energy services, power/utility, and industrial sectors. The
Framework shall bring together the computerization of control applications
under the umbrella of single integrated system architecture. The suite of component
software applications shall support true plug-and-play, multi-vendor
interoperability, resulting in lower automation and information infrastructure costs.
The Network Area Controllers (NAC’s) shall run a JAVA Virtual Machine
(JVM) platform and use a common set of tools for accessing and integrating
multipleprotocols.
D. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of Network Area
Controller or Controllers (NAC)/ Routers. The NAC/ Router shall connect to the
local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either
locally in each building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be
accomplished through standard Web
browsers,viatheInternetand/[Link]
communicate to LonMark/LonTalk and/or BACnet Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) and other open protocolsystems/devices.

E. The following software packages shall be loaded into the system as minimum
standard:-
a. Complete system operationalsoftware
b. Site specific data manipulationsoftware
c. Active graphicssoftware
d. Energy management systemsoftware
e. Alarm indicationsoftware
g. Data VisualizationPackage
h. Internet Enabled Remote MonitoringPackage.

1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the components and devices for the entire
control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of
equipment and materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and
installation instructions for all controllers, valves, dampers, sensors, routers, etc.
Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams,
software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system.
Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A
complete written Sequence of Operation shall also be included with the submittal
package. BMS contractors supplying products and systems, as part of their
packages shall provide catalog data sheets, wiring diagrams and point lists to
other contractors for proper coordination ofwork.
B. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator
workstations, control panel locations and a description of the
communicationtype,[Link]
these diagrams for their portions of work; the Systems Integrator shall be responsible for integrating those diagrams into the
overall trunk cable schematic diagrams for the entire Wide Area Network (WAN).

C. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all points to be connected to
theBMS.
D. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of ‘as-built’ drawings and
application software on compact disk. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCAD™
compatible files. Eight copies of the ‘as-built’ drawings shall be provided in
addition to the documents on compact disk. BMS contractors shall provide asbuilt
for their portions of work. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for asbuilt
pertaining to overall BMS architecture and network diagrams. All as-built drawings
shall also be installed into the BMS server in a dedicateddirectory.

1.4 SPECIFICATIONNOMENCLATURE
A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: FMCS
Facility Management and Control System BMS Building
ManagementSystem
NAC Network AreaController
DDC Direct DigitalController
IBC Interoperable BACnetController
GUI Graphical UserInterface
WBI Web BrowserInterface
PMI Power MeasurementInterface
LAN Local AreaNetwork
WAN Wide AreaNetwork
OOT Object OrientedTechnology
PICS Product Interoperability ComplianceStatement

1.5 DIVISION OFWORK

A. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (DDC), control devices,
control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller
input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring.
B. The BMS contractor shall also be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s)
(NAC), software and programming of the NAC, graphical user interface
software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web
browserpages,setupofschedules,logsandalarms,BACNET
/LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local or wide areanetwork.

1.6 AGENCY AND CODEAPPROVALS

All products of the BMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all
submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following
approvals are not acceptable.
1. UL-916; Energy ManagementSystems
 2. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “signal
Equipment”
3. CE
4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A ComputingDevices

1.7 SOFTWARE LICENSEAGREEMENT

A. The CLIENT/ CPWD shall agree to the manufacturer's standard software and
firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant
use of all programs and application software to CLIENT/ CPWD as defined by
the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer's rights to
disclosure of trade secrets contained within suchsoftware.
B. The CLIENT/ CPWD shall be the named license holder of all software associated
with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, CLIENT/
CPWD shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data
files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all
custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and
programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the
NAC, BMS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected
routers and devices. Any and all required IDs and passwords for access to any
component or software program shall be provided to the CLIENT/ CPWD. The
CLIENT/ CPWD shall determine which organizations to be named in the SI
organization ID (“orgid”) of all software licenses. CLIENT/ CPWD shall be free
to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless
ofsupplier.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE ANDHANDLING

A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and
handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected fromweather.

1.9 JOBCONDITIONS
A. Cooperation with Other Contractors: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to ensure that the Work will
be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible
conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical
outletsandfixtures,airdiffusers,andstructuralandarchitecturalfeatures.

2. MATERIALS
2.1. GENERAL

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of

interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user
interface software, printers, network devices, valves, dampers, sensors, and other
devices as specifiedherein. All
systems and software within BMS shall be Year 2000 compliant and shall be supported by compliance documentation from
themanufacturer.
Management stations must match the BACnet Profile B-AWS (Advanced workstation) as per the BTL Listing. Management
stations must meet the AMEV profile MBE-A and MBE-B as per AMEV guidelines "Bacnet 2011"

B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features,
functions and data contained in the overallBMS.

2.2. OPEN, INTEROPERABLE,

INTEGRATEDARCHITECTURES
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, standalone,
distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
135-2001 BACnet, LonWorks technology, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and
proprietary communication protocols in one open, interoperablesystem.
B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for
representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition,
adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001,
BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is
required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the
device supplier must provide an XIF file and a resource file for the device. For
each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing
the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with
the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of
BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP) and/or RS- 485
(BACnet MSTP) asspecified.
C. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true
“peerto-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring
“polling” by a host to pass data shall not beacceptable.
D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard
Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration
programs. An Open Data Base Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query
Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database
parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all
database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs
shall not be acceptable.
E. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and
to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s
internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall
not beacceptable.
1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected
userinterfaces.
2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or
dial-up connected userinterfaces.
 2.3. NETWORKS
A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network
supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and SOAP for maximum flexibility for
integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing
support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and, if
specified, a localserver.
B. Local area network minimum physical and media accessrequirements:
1. Ethernet; IEEE standard802.3
2. Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category5
3. Minimum throughput; 100Mbps.

2.4. NETWORKACCESS
A. Remote Access.
For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the Internet. The CLIENT/ CPWD
shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line
(ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service
Provider (ISP). Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection andISP.

2.5. NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) /ROUTER

A. The BMS contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) /
Router as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent
on the type and quantity of devices provided in IO Summary.
B. The Network Area Controller (NAC)/ Router shall provide the interface between the
LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory
control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC / Router. It shall be
capable of executing application control programs toprovide:
1. Calendarfunctions
2. Scheduling
3. Trending
4. Alarm monitoring androuting
5. Timesynchronization
6. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controllerdata
7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks baseddevices
C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as
aminimum:
1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100Mbps
2. One RS-232port
3. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KBFTT-10A
4. One RS-485 ports BACNET/ MSTPport
5. BatteryBackup
 6. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not
supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte
storagecapacity)
7. The NAC/ Router must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32
to122°F
8. The NAC/ Router must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of
between 0 and158°F
9. The NAC / Router must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to
95% RH,non-condensing
D. The NAC/ Router shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for
ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC / Router shall be an
ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to
read and write data stored withinit.
E. The NAC/Router shall support standard Web browser access via the
Intranet/Internet.Itshallsupportaminimumof32simultaneoususers.
F. Event Alarm Notification andactions
1. The NAC / Router shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management,
and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application
specificcontrollers.
2. The NAC / Router/ Software shall be able to route any alarm condition to any
defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up
telephone connection, or wide-areanetwork.
3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limitedto:
a. Toalarm
b. Return tonormal
c. Tofault
4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of
routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: Electricals, HVAC, Fire,etc.
5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate passwordcontrol.
G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by
theuser:
1. Screen messagetext
2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to
route and email alarms basedon:
a. Day ofweek
b. Time ofday
 c. Recipient
3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
4. Graphic with flashing alarmobject(s)
5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarmprinter
I. The following shall be recorded by the NAC / Router for each alarm (at a minimum):

1. Time anddate
2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number,etc.)
3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway,etc.)
4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issuedacknowledgement.
5. Number of occurrences since lastacknowledgement.
J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for
thatpurpose.
K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific
types or classes of alarms defined by theuser.
L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC/ Router/ Software and/or a
server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by theuser.
M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user
definedparameters.
N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by theuser.
O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by theuser.

2.6. DATA COLLECTION ANDSTORAGE

A. The NAC/ Router shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object
and store this data for futureuse.
B. Thedatacollectionshallbeperformedbylogobjects,residentintheNAC
/ Router that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:

1. Designating the log as interval ordeviation.

2. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and
the sample collectioninterval.
3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a
fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of theobject.
4. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log
and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a
first-in, first-outbasis.
5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a
user-defined event oraction.
C. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC / Router and the
data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard
Webbrowser.
D. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated
using standard SQLstatements.
E. All log data shall be available to the user in the following dataformats:
1. HTML
2. XML
3. PlainText
4. Comma or tab separatedvalues
F. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall
not beacceptable.
G. The NAC / Router shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to
itself), or remotely to a server or other NAC/ Router on the network. Provide the
ability to configure the following archiving properties, at aminimum:
1. Archive on time ofday
2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffersize)
3. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of datastores
4. Provide ability to clear logs oncearchived

2.7. AUDITLOG
A. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC/
Router. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to
archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size.
Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC / Router), to another
NAC / Router on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the
followingdata:
1. Time anddate
2. UserID
3. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands,etc.

2.8. DATABASE BACKUP ANDSTORAGE

A. The NAC / Router shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The
database shall be backed up based on a user-defined timeinterval.
B. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be
stored in the NAC / Router. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent
on the user-defined database saveinterval.
C. The NAC / Router database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow
for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long
as XML format issupported.

2.9. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS(DDC)

 A. Direct Digital Controllers shall be 32 bit microprocessor based Interoperable
LonWorksControllers.
B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) / Router will provide all scheduling, alarming,
trending, and network management for the LonMark / LonWorks baseddevices.
C. The DDC shall be 32-Bit Hi Performancecontroller.
D. The DDC shall be a freely programmable native BacNetController
E. It shall have 22base I/Osonboard
F. It shall have minimum 6DO,16UIO.
G. The Analog Inputs shall have min 16 bit A/Dresolution
H. It shall have one MSTP port to connect over MSTPnetwork.
I. It shall allow peer to peer communication and sharing of data point values with other
controllers over MSTPnetwork.
J. The DDCs shall communicate with the NAC / Router at a baud rate of not less than
78.8K baud. The DDC shall provide LED indication of communication and
controller performance to the technician, without coverremoval.
K. All DDCs shall be fully application programmable. Controllers offering application
selection only (non programmable) are not acceptable,require a 10% spare point
capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or
programmed into the DDC shall be stored in non- volatile memory, which is not
dependent upon the presence of a battery, to beretained.
L. The BMS contractor supplying the DDC’s shall provide documentation for each
device, with the following information at aminimum:
1. Network Variable Inputs (nvi’s); name andtype
2. Network Variable Outputs (nvo’s); name andtype
3. Network configuration parameters (nci, nco); name andtype
M. It is the responsibility of the BMS contractor to ensure that the proper Network
Variable Inputs and Outputs (nvi and nvo) are provided in each DDC, as required by
the pointcharts.
N. The supplier of any programmable DDC shall provide one copy of the
manufacturer’s programming tool, with documentation, to the CLIENT/ CPWD.
O. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other LonMark™ devices
or stand-alone operation. Automation stations must match the BACnet Profile B-BC
(Building Controller)/ B-AAC Profile as per the BTL Listing. Application Specific
Controllers (B-ASC) as per BACnet Profile shall not be acceptable. Manufacturer
self-declaration PICS is required prior to executing work to gain information on the
type of communication for the building automation and controlsystem.
None of the trend data may be lost during communications failure to achieve gap-free trend documentation. For this reason, all
trend data must be created and saved to the automation station. After communications are restored, all values saved on the
management [Link]
support trending & scheduling at Controller level. The same should be independent of Supervisory Controller / Management
Station.

Automation Station must Control, measure, signal at various priorities and by event, monitor, alarm, count, calculate, schedule,
save trend values, and log as per DIN EN ISO16484-5
DDC Module must support Segmentation
P. The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains onchip
FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main
HVAC application. The second processor for LonWorks™
networkcommunications.
a. FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes 8 MB for
applicationprogram.
b. FLASH Memory settings retained for tenyears.
c. RAM: 2 Kilobytes16MB
Q. The controller shall have an FTT transformer-coupled communications port
interface for common mode-noise rejection and DCisolation.
R. The controller shall have an internal time clock with the ability to automatically
revert from a master time clock onfailure.
a. Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year calendar including day of week and
configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on
configured start and stopdates.
b. Accuracy: ±1 minute per month at 77° F (25°C).
c. Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C).
S The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update capability,
and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their
configurable timeframe.
T Rated voltage: 20-30 VAC, 50/60Hz
U The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors.
a. Power Output: 20 VDC ±10% at 75mA.
V The controller shall have a visual indication (LED) of the status of the device:
a. Controller operatingnormally.
b. Controller in process ofdownload.
c. Controller in manual mode under control of softwaretool.
d. Controller lost itsconfiguration.
e. No power to controller, low voltage, or controllerdamage.
f. Processor and/or controller is notoperating.
S The minimum controller Environmental ratings:
a. Operating Temperature Ambient Rating:-40° to 150° F (-40° to 65.5° C).
b. Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40° to 65.5°C).
c. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95%non-condensing.
W The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings,
andapprovals:
a. UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy Management
Equipment) with plenumrating.
b. CSA (LR95329-3)Listed
c. Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions) requirements.
d. Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiatedemissions).
e. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1; 2001
(EUImmunity)
f. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-63; 2001
(EUEmission)
X The controller shall have three analog outputs(AO).
a. Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital outputs(DO).
b. Input and Output wiring terminal strips shall be removable from the controller
without disconnectingwiring.
c. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded labels.
Y The controller shall provide for “user defined” Network Variables (NV) for
customizedconfigurations.

2.10. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACESOFTWARE

A. Operating System: The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows XP Professional.
B. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall
include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and
access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs,
and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator
to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic
computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward
buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line),
that displays the location and the selected objectidentification.
C. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical
features andfunctions:
1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of
generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file
formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the
GUI shall support the use of scannedpictures.
2. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real- time values,
animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links,
schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphicscreens.
 3. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for
assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points shall be accomplished in a graphicalmanner.
a. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any
keyboard entry from theoperator.
b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar without requiring any keyboard
entry from theoperator.
5. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop- up menu. No
entry of text shall berequired.
6. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right- clicking the
selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text
shall berequired.
D. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform
the following tasks, with proper passwordaccess:
a. Create, delete or modify controlstrategies.
b. Add/delete objects to thesystem.
c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loopparameters.
d. Enable or disable controlstrategies.
e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on aprinter.
f. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarmstate.
g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of
valuesautomatically.
E. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the
operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all
applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional
help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system
documentation and help files shall be in HTMLformat.
F. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name
and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be
selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set
passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password
shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each
system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall
automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is
detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system
security data shall be stored in an encryptedformat.
G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels,
and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to theoperator.
H. Programming software shall be same as GUI. The Same GUI can be used to
configure the DDCs &NAC.
I. AlarmConsole
1. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This
 window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view
details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console
can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
2. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will
supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being
minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new
alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that
can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not beacceptable.

2.10.1 SPECIAL ENERGY MANAGEMENT REPORTING

AND PROFILING APPLICATIONS
These reports are defined below.
1. Aggregate Demand Summary - This report aggregates (totalizes) multiple points
(meters) and shows the peak, minimum, average, and total consumption as well as
computes load factor. By reducing peak consumption and leveling the total load,
volatility is reduced and energy customers can make significant improvements in
their energy procurement. This report will help identify favorable aggregation
combinations and unattractive peaks. Once the user selects this report, they define
parameters such as sites, meters, time period, and commodity. The following
screen shot is an example of Aggregate DemandSummary.
2. Summary Ranking Reports - By selecting this report, the user can identify the 10
worst or 10 best sites in the database. Once the report type has been selected,
parameters to define before the report can be generated will include thefollowing:
a. Measurement unit – KW, therms, CCF gallons, PSI, etc. The database will search
for all values matching therequest.
b. Compare an entire facility or normalize by squarefoot
c. Time periods tocompare
d. Highest values or lowest values – Will be able to view either the best or worst 10
points matching the definedparameters
e. Cost or consumption in futurerevisions
3. Spectrum Summary Report – A quick view of any point or aggregated point with
color coding identifying the reasonableness of the data value. The chart can report on
up to one year of data, with the ability to zoom to a higher definition. As data
values approach and/or exceed historical ranges, the color on the graph will change
to identify such. If all data values are within historical ranges, the user can move
on to other functions. In the following screen shot, the Spectrum Summary Report
is reporting on total electricity for an aggregated point, which consists of 6
[Link],withtheblueidentifyinglow loads overnight
and on weekends. The fourth weekend in the report was a three day weekend
which is identified by a larger blue gap. A user can also see rising consumption (red)
as temperatures rise going into the summer season. When the user clicks on an area
of the graph, the data value along with time stamp will appear. The colors and
associated data value ranges are user definable. The following screen shot is an
example of the Spectrum SummaryReport.
4. Equipment Operation Reports - Users will have the ability to analyze digital
points and identify run times. Comparisons between sites or points can be made and
run times can be graphed. For example, comparing lighting or HVAC run hours in a
group of stores or comparing HVAC run hours in June for Store 1 versus Store 2.
Data will be displayed in time andpercentage.
5. Relative Contribution Report – This pie chart report will give users the ability to
identify how individual points contribute to a total from a point group. The user
would select a group of points, calculate the aggregate consumption of the group,
and report on the individual contribution of each. Data will be displayed both
graphically in a pie chart as well as in tabular format. Users could identify that
HVAC is 48% of the building load; lighting is 42%, or Building 1 accounts for 14%
of the total enterprise load and Building 2 contributes 19%. This report will allow
users to identify inefficiencies and help performbudgeting.
6. Average Profile – The report will allow the user to average the load for a single load
across time periods and give the average load, and/or aggregate multiple meters
(loads) and view the average aggregated load. This report will be very beneficial
when negotiating with energy service providers because it includes the load profile
and consumption totals. With the ability to filter by time periods, measurement
units, points or point groups, weekdays, and weekends, load profiles with
associated data will allow the user to procure exactly the amount of energy
required. This reduces risk for the energy provider and therefore reduces cost for
theend-user.
7. The user will be able to manipulate between 1-minute intervals and hourly intervals.
In addition, users will be able to choose between auto scale and manual scale. For
example, if the minimum value is 100KW and the maximum is 500 kW, the user can
have the chart automatically scale between those values or they can select any range
to scale the 400kW range. When printing charts, this may be useful. This will be
useful for sophisticated users who need a higher resolution of data. The following
screen shot is an example of the Average ProfileReport.
8. Point Trending – This report will allow the user to choose a single or multiple points
and trend the values over a specified time period. Either analog or digital points can
be trended and multiple variables can be selected to be report. For a visual
representation of several point values, the user will view all points on the left Y-axis.
If the user would like to perform a statistical analysis identifying correlation
coefficient and standard deviation between variables, they will have the ability to
select a single point for each Y-axis. If a point group has been created, it would
be presented as a single point value. The same auto scale/manual scale feature
discussed in Average Profile Report is available in Point Trending.
ThefollowingscreenshotisanexampleofthePointTrendingReport.
9. Exception Report – This report will identify all data values for the specified period
that does not fall in a user-defined range. Although the range will be user
definable, the benchmark or baseline to be compared against will be historical data.
Users can get to this report by selecting it among the library of report templates, or
can automatically be taken here from the Average Profile Report or Point Trending
Report by clicking on an “Exception” button once a profile is beingviewed.

2.11. WEB BROWSERCLIENTS

A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a
standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™.
Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be
resident on the client machine, or manufacture- specific browsers shall not
beacceptable.
B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system
configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific
machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to
allow the Web browser to function with the FMCS, shall not beacceptable.
C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views
or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or
logs, shall not bepermitted.
D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user
attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall
beimplemented.
2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web
browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be
supported by the Web browserinterface.
3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a
Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a
specific look orformat.
4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC),
without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine.
Systemsthatrequiregraphicsstorageoneachclientarenotacceptable.
5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual “refresh” of the Webpage.
6. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access
privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points
in a graphicalmanner.
7. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any
keyboard entry from theoperator.
8. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard
entry from theoperator.
a. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the popup menu. No
entry of text shall berequired.
b. View logs andcharts
c. View and acknowledgealarms
d. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archiveinformation
9. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to
just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages
in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the systemadministrator.
10. 8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desiredlink.

2.12. SERVER FUNCTIONS ANDHARDWARE

A. A central server shall be provided. The server shall support all Network Area
Controllers (NAC)/ Router connected to the customer’s network whether local
 orremote.
B. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via
ISDN, ADSL, T1 or dial-upconnection.
C. It shall be possible to provide access to all Network Area Controllers via a single
connection to the server. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be
accessed from a remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web
browser(WBI) by connecting to the server.
D. The server shall provide the following functions, at aminimum:
1. Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data
defined anywhere in thesystem.
2. Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global control
strategies based on control and data objects in any NAC/ Router in the network,
local orremote.
3. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time
synchronization for all Network Area Controllers (NAC)/ Routers.
4. The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision
Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on thisdata.
5. The server shall provide scheduling for all Network Area Controllers and their
underlying field controldevices.
6. The server shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Network Area
Controllers. The server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with
multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be
capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demandcontrol.
7. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels)
for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Network Area
Controllers / Routers. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not
beaccepted.
8. Each Network Area Controller/ Router supported by the server shall have the ability
to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically.
Archiving options shall be user-defined including archive time and
archivefrequency.
9. The server shall provide central alarm management for all Network Area
Controllers/ Routers supported by the server. Alarm management shall include:
i. Routing of alarms to display, printer, email andpagers

ii. View and acknowledgealarms

iii. Query alarm logs based on user-definedparameters

10. The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Area
Controllers/ Routers supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs,
runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management
shallinclude:
i. Viewing and printing logdata

ii. Exporting log data to other softwareapplications

iii. Query log data based on user-definedparameters

E. Server Hardware Requirements: The server hardware platform shall have the
 followingrequirements:
1. The computer shall be an Intel Pentium M based computer (minimum processing
speed of 2.4 GHz with 1 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It
shall include a DVD-ROM/CD-RW Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports,
2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 17” flat panel color
monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time shall also
beincluded.
2. The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows XP2008 professional or
latest version. Include Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
3. Connection to the BMS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card,
100Mbps.
4. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x
600-dpi resolution and rated for 60-PPM print speed minimum.
5. For dedicated alarm printing, provide a dot matrix printer, either 80 or 132 column
width. The printer shall have a parallel portinterface.

2.13. SYSTEMPROGRAMMING
A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform
system programming and graphic display engineering as part of
[Link]
features of the GUI shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.

B. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the
creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created
by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting
them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical
connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future
use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for
the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the
application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or
object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display.
Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to
createapplicationsanduserinterfacedisplaysshallnotbeacceptable.
C. ProgrammingMethods
1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a
user defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a
graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links
will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects
shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are
positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on
other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of
link; i.e., internal, external, hardware,etc.
2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using
fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming,
scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration
will not beaccepted.
3. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When
on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time
for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode
shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing
 execution before it is applied to the system.
4. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading,
editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.
5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An
application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re- use and
duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained
duringduplication.

2.14. LonWorks NETWORKMANAGEMENT

A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide a complete set of
integrated LonWorks network management tools for working with LonWorks
networks. These tools shall manage a database for all LonWorks devices by type
and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for identifying each device on
the network. These tools shall
alsobecapableofdefiningnetworkdataconnectionsbetweenLonWorks devices, known
as “binding”. Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network
management tools shall not be accepted.
B. Network management shall include the following services: device identification,
device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance
and network variablebinding.
C. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on
the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters withindevices.
D. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network,
regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing
network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a
single network managementdatabase.
E. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller
(NAC)/ Router, ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the
network management database at all times. Systems employing network
management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system,
shall not beaccepted.

2.15. OBJECTLIBRARIES
A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of
application logic, user interface displays, system services, and
communicationnetworks.
B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the
user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition,
the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and
store the new instances of these objects in a user-definedlibrary.
C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall
maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered
users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they aredeveloped.
D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified inthe
BACnetspecification.
E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at
aminimum:
 1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in
the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling
features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by
graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-offevents.
2. Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the
BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or
special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection.
This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective
eventcontrol.
3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive
on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of
these objects may be created to control equipment at varyingintervals
4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is
capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs
(scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment
freezeprotection.
5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization
object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring
space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow
equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough
ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings.
Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the
previous day’sperformance.
6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that
is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and
gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and
predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end
of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also
accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon
a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of
6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off
user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy
reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the
demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as
an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand.
The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a
fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon
suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the
equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable
object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both
equipment protection and occupantcomfort.
F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control
objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.
1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard
for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned foralarming.
2. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by
temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.
3. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for datasharing.
4. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard
for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming.
 This object must also include the capabilityto record equipment run-time by
counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user
must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition.
5. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for
equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet
Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple
control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority
command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems
not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not
beacceptable.
6. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to
be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control,
as well as proportional, integral and derivativecontrol.
7. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to
select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also,
allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.
8. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum
or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow
limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.
9. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of
new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must
provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define
object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions,
string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive
online debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects
to be stored in the library forre-use.
10. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination
of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar
types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that
when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically
without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a
schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm
monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will
be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for
stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also
stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air
handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during
the offperiod.
11. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose isto provide the
capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified
high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired
binaryoutput object aswell as to ananalog object for temperature monitoring, to
cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the
Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by
theuser.
12. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects
representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from
tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the
ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained”
 application that are represented on the graphical shell of thiscontainer.
G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices
connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC) / Router. At a minimum, provide
the following as part of the standard library included with the
programmingsoftware:
1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to,
devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide LonMark
manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All
network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information
(type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile
shall be provided by the devicemanufacturer.
2. For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that
can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the
device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file
and documentation for the device to facilitate deviceintegration.
3. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at aminimum:
a. AnalogIn
b. AnalogOut
c. AnalogValue
d. Binary
e. Binary In
f. Binary Out
g. Binary Value
h. Multi-StateIn
i. Multi-StateOut
j. Multi-StateValue
k. ScheduleExport
l. CalendarExport
m. TrendExport
n. Device
4. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and
object instancenumber.
5. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at aminimum
a. Segmentation
b. SegmentedRequest
c. SegmentedResponse
d. ApplicationServices
e. ReadProperty
f. Read PropertyMultiple
g. WriteProperty
h. Write PropertyMultiple
i. Confirmed EventNotification
 j. Unconfirmed EventNotification
k. AcknowledgeAlarm
l. Get AlarmSummary
m. Who-has
n. I-have
o. Who-is
p. I-am
q. SubscribeCOV
r. Confirmed COVnotification
s. Unconfirmed COVnotification
t. MediaTypes
u. Ethernet
v. BACnet IP AnnexJ
w. MSTP
x. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)function
y. Routing

2.16. DDE DEVICEINTEGRATION

A. The Network Area Controller / Router shall support the integration of device data
via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), over the Ethernet Network. The Network
Area Controller shall act as a DDE client to another software application that
functions as a DDEserver.
B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User
Interface programming software, to support the integration of these devices into the
[Link] provided shall include at a minimum:
1. DDE Generic AIObject
2. DDE Generic AOObject
3. DDE Generic BOObject
4. DDE Generic BIObject

2.17. MODBUS SYSTEMINTEGRATION

A. The Network Area Controller / Router shall support the integration of device data
from Modbus RTU, ASCII, or TCP control system devices. The connection to the
Modbus system shall be via an RS-232, RS485, or Ethernet IP as required by
thedevice.
B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User
Interface programming software, to support the integration of the Modbus system
data into the BMS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:
1. Read/Write Modbus AIRegisters
2. Read/Write Modbus AORegisters
3. Read/Write Modbus BIRegisters
4. Read/Write Modbus BORegisters
C. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the
Modbus System devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller.
D. The BMS supplier shall provide a Modbus system communications driver. The
equipment system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing Modbus shall
provide documentation of the system’s Modbus interface and shall provide
factory support at no charge during system commissioning

2.18. OPC SYSTEMINTEGRATION

A. The Network Area Controller / Router shall act as an OPC client and shall support
the integration of device data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server
shall be Ethernet IP as required by the device. The OPC client shall support third
party OPC servers compatible with the Data Access 1.0 and 2.0specifications.
B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User
Interface programming software, to support the integration of the OPC system data
into the BMS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:
1. Read/Write OPC AIObject
2. Read/Write OPC AOObject
3. Read/Write OPC BIObject
4. Read/Write OPC BOObject
5. Read/Write OPC Date/Time InputObject
6. Read/Write OPC Date/Time OutputObject
7. Read/Write OPC String InputObject
8. Read/Write OPC String OutputObject
C. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the
OPC system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller /Router.
D. The BMS supplier shall provide an OPC client communications driver. The
equipment system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing OPC shall provide
documentation of the system’s OPC server interface and
shallprovidefactorysupportatnochargeduringsystemcommissioning.

2.19. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP)
A. The browser workstation shall be an Intel Pentium Core i7 based computer
(minimum processing speed of 3.0 Ghz with 8.0 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte 1.0
TB minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVDRW Combination Drive, and USB
ports. A minimum 19" flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset
resolution, 25 ms response time, shall also beincluded.
B. Connection to the BMS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card,
1.0GB.
C. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x
600-dpi resolution and rated for 8 PPM print speed minimum.

2.20. OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE-

FIELDDEVICES
2.20.1. ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS RELATEDEQUIPMENT
A. GeneralRequirements
All controls shall be capable of operating in ambient conditions varying between
0-55 deg. C and 90% [Link]-condensing.

All Control devices shall have a 20 mm conduit knockout. Alternatively, they shall
be supplied with adaptors for 20 mmconduit.
B. AncillaryItems
When items of equipment are installed in the situations listed below, the BAS
contractor shall include the following ancillary items:
(i) WeatherProtection

All devices required to be weatherproofed are detailed in the Schedule of Quantities.

IP ratings for the equipment is mentioned in the respective section.
(ii) PipeworkImmersion

Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the
device, screwed ½” (13 mm) or ¾” (20mm) NPT suitable for the temperature,
pressure and medium.
(iii) Duct Mounting (Metal or BuildersWork)

Mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, locknuts, gaskets, brackets,

sealing glands and any special fittings necessitated by the device.
(iv) Additional features
(a) Concealed Adjustment: All two position switching devices shall have concealed
adjustment unless statedotherwise.
(b) Operating Voltage : All two position switching devices shall operate on 230 V
A.C and all accessible live parts shall be shrouded. An earth terminal shall
beprovided.

2.20.2. TEMPERATURESENSOR
Temperature sensors for space, pipes and ducts, shall be of the Resistance
Temperature detector (RTD) type or thermistor. These shall
betwowiretypeandshallconformtothefollowingspecifications:
1) Immersion sensors shall be high accuracy type with a high resistance versus
temperature change. The accuracy shall be atleast ± 0.33 degrees F and sensitivity
of atleast 2ohm/F.
2) Immersion sensors shall be provided with separate stainless steel thermo
well. These shall be manufactured from bar stock with hydrostatic pressure rating of
atleast 10kgf/cm2.
3) The connection to the pipe shall be screwed ¾ inch NPT (M). An aluminum
sleeve shall be provided to ensure proper heat transfer from the well to
the sensor. Terminations to be provided on the head. Flying leads shall not
beacceptable.
4) The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed
without disturbing the wiringconnections.
5) Duct temperature sensors shall be with rigid stem and of averaging type. These shall
be suitable for ductinstallation.
6) Outdoor air temperature sensor shall be provided with a sunshield.
7) The sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows,
 electrical appliancesetc.

The temperature sensors may be of any of the following types:

1) PT 100, PT1000,
PT 3000
2) NI 100, NI1000
3) Balco500.
4) Thermistor

2.20.3 HUMIDITY SENSOR

Space and duct humidity sensors shall be of capacitance type with an effective
sensing range of 10% to 90% RH. Accuracy shall be + 3% or better. Duct mounted
humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Wall mounted sensors
shall be provided with a housing. The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that
the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The
sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows, electrical
appliances etc.

2.20.4. FLOW METER

Water flow meters shall be either Ultrasonic type or electromagnetic type. For
electromagnetic flow meter, Teflon lining with 316 SS electrodes must be provided.
The housing shall have IP 55 protection. Vendors shall have to get their design/
selection approved by the HITES, prior to the supply. The exact ranges to be set shall
be determined by the contractor at the timeof commissioning. It should be
possible to ‘zero’ the flowmeter without any external instruments, with the
overall accuracy of atleast ± 1% fullscale.

2.20.5. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FORWATER

Pressure transmitters shall be piezo-electric type or diaphragm type. (Bourdon Tube
type shall not be acceptable). Output shall be 4-20mA or 0-10V DC and the range as
specified in the data sheet depending on the line pressure. Power supply shall be
either 24 V AC, 24 V DC or 230 V AC. Connection shall be as per manufacturer’s
standards. The pressure detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test
pressure of twice the working pressure. The set point shall fall within
40%-70% of the sensing range and detector shall have sensitivity such that change
of 1.5% from the stabilized condition shall cause modulation of the corrective
element. The sensor must be pressure compensated for a medium temperature of
-10 o C to 60o C with ambient ranging between 0 o C to 55 oC.

2.20.6. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR

PIPEWORK
These shall be used to measure pressure differential across suction and discharge of
pumps. The range shall be as specified in the data sheet. Switch shall be ON with
increase in differential. Housing for these shall be weather proof with IP 55
protection. The pressure switch shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test
pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure. The set point shall fall in 40-70% of
the scale range and shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale
range. The switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2 NO/NC
 contacts.

2.20.7. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR

AIRSYSTEMS
These shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections
permitting their use as static or differential pressure switches. The switch shall be of
differential pressure type complete with connecting tube and metal bends for
connections to the duct. The housing shall be IP 54 rated. The pressure switches shall
be available in minimum of 3 ranges suitable for applications like Air flow
proving, dirty filter, etc. The set point shall be concealed type. The contact shall be
SPDT type with 230 VAC, 1 Arating.

The switch shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting on ducts in any plane. It
should be mounted in such a way that the condensation flow out of the sensing tips.
Proper adaptor shall be provided for thecables.

The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range and l has differentials
adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range.
The switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2
NO/NCcontacts.

2.20.8. AIR FLOWSWITCHES

Air flow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size
[Link] in the Schedule
of Quantity the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand
suchconditions.

These shall be suitable for mounting in any plane. Output shall be 2 NO/NC
potential free. Site adjustable scale shall also be provided.

2.20.9. AIR PRESSURESENSOR

The pressure sensor shall be differential type. The construction shall be spring
loaded diaphragm type. The movement of the membrane in relation to the
pressure should be converted by an inductive electromagnet coupling which
would give an output suitable for the controller. The pressure sensor shall be in a
housing having IP 54 ratings in accordance with IEC 529. Suitable mounting
arrangement shall be available on the sensor. The sensor shall come complete with
the PVC tubes &probes.

2.20.10. WATER FLOWSWITCH

These shall be paddle type and suitable for the type of liquid flowing in the line.
Output shall be 2NO/2NC potentialfree.

2.20.11. TRANSDUCERS FOR ELECTRICALSERVICES

Electrical transducers shall be integrated electronic type and rack mounted on
the field. These shall work on 230 V supply with the output being standard type i.e.
4-20 mA, 0- 10 Voltsetc.

Power factor, Voltage, Current, Frequency and Kilowatt transducers shall have
standard output signal for measurement for the specified variable.
 Kilowatt-Hour metering (if any) shall be poly-phase; three-element with current
transformer (CT) operated type. The metering shall feature high accuracy with no
more than +/- 1% error over the expected load range. The coils shall be totally
encapsulated against high impulselevels.

2.20.12. LEVELSWITCH
The level switches shall have to meet the following requirement :
Type : Float Type/Capacitance type/Conductivitytype
Mounting : To suitapplication.
Connection : Flanged ANSI 150 lbs RF Carbon steel Floatmaterial : 316SS
StemMaterial : 316SS
Output : 2 NO, 2 NC potential free SwitchEnclosure : IP55

2.20.13. DIGITALTHERMOSTATS
Thermostats for FCU’s should be Digital on/off OR Modulating Type for Actuating
2 way or 3 way Valves (On-off/Modulating)
Thermostats should display Room Temp and Setpoint simultaneously which is easy
to read from atleast 6-8 feetdistance.

Thermostats should have Fan Speed Control Switch (Low-Med-High- Auto). Auto
Mode should be able to save energy by automatically reducing the Fan Speed
when Room Temp Achieves SetPoint.

LCD Display should be available in Blue or Green Backlit for ease in viewing the
Room Temperature andSetpoint.

Thermostats should work on 230V PS for on-off models and 24V for Modulating
Thermostats

The User Settings should be retained in Thermostat Memory in case of Power

Failure
The Switching Relays should be separately wired and should be mounted inside the
Junction Box, so that the Thermostat front is sleek in mounting. Thermostat
Thickness should be 17mm or less
Thermostats should have Energy Savings Feature with dual setpoint which can be
interlocked with Occupancy Sensor or Hotel Key Card input. This should be
indicated in the LCD Display in the mode it is being operated. This Programming
should be possible by Hotel maintenance Staff.

Thermostats should be similar or equivalent to Honeywell Halo Series Digital

Thermostats Model T6861(on/off) or T6865(modulating) version.

2.20.14. Pressure Independent Dynamic Balancing

Valve (ranges from25mm to150mm)
The Valve should have self Dynamic Flow Control Valves that are pressure
independent, two way, Modulating to accept digital/analog input BMS/Controller
signals and should provide position feedback signal to the control system. The
 Feedback signal should have the feedback feature of the Valve/Actuator itself
without any need of any additional accessory/instrument/device.
• PICV should be capable of maintaining the max flow rate atleast +/-4% Accuracy
• The PICV Should be capable of maintaining Linear Temperature Control, Pressure
Independence and Electric Modulation in one Valvebody.
• The Flow rates should be field settable electronically upto 60% of the valve Max
set Flowrate
• The Differential Pressure Ranges for which the valve can maintain the flow rates
should be mentioned in the Productliterature
• Valve Actuator housing shall be rated toIP54
• Actuator shall be driven by a 24Vac power supply and shall accept universal Input
signals like 0/2-10Vdc or 4-20mAsignal
• Actuator shall be capable of providing feedback Signal of 0/2-10Vdc to the
ControlSystem/BMS
• PICV should have an option for adjusting the Flow Characteristics as per AHU in
every PICV to ensure Linear TempControl.
• PICV should have an option for changing the Max Flow Rates in future and no
additional Instrument should be required. Flow Values can be
changedbyenteringinLCDDisplayonlyandnotbyanyDIPSwitchesor
• Setting Dial to improve accuracy.
• PICV shall provide full valveAuthority
• PICV Valve body shall be rated at leastPN16
• Max Close off Pressure shall be mentioned in the ProductDatasheet.
• Min Working Differential Pressure shall be30Kpa
• Valve shall be Internal BSP Threaded from DN25 to DN50 and Flanged end
Connection for DN65 toDN150
• Min Stroke Length of the Valve shall be20mm
• Media Temperature : 0-130 degC
• Valve shall be of Brass/Bronze Construction upto DN50 and Cast Iron
uptoDN150
• Shut off Leakage shall be 0.1Kvs

2.20.15. Motorized ButterflyValve

1.1.52. Valve Body 1.1.53.
1.1.54. Type of Valve 1.1.55. Butterfly Valve
1.1.56. Body Material 1.1.57. Cast Iron or Ductile Iron
Body
1.1.58. Disc Material 1.1.59. Nickel plated Ductile Iron
1.1.60. Stem 1.1.61. SS416
1.1.62. Liner Material 1.1.63. EPDM
1.1.64. Nominal Static Body 1.1.65. PN16
1.1.66. Rating Tightness 1.1.67. Bubble Tight
1.1.68. Medium Temperature 1.1.69. -10 dec C to 120 deg C
1.1.70. Pipe Connection 1.1.71. ISO7005-2
1.1.72. Actuator Type 1.1.73. Electric
 1.1.74. Motor Supply 1.1.75. 230 VAC, 50Hz/60Hz
1.1.76. Travel Angle 1.1.77. 90 deg +/- 5 deg
1.1.78. Enclosure 1.1.79. IP67 Waterproof
1.1.80. Indicator [Link] Position
Indicator
1.1.82. Space Heater 1.1.83.15W 220V
AntiCondensation
1.1.84. Stall Protection 1.1.85. Built-in thermal protection
Cut off at 125 ± 5 Reset at 95 ±
5
1.1.86. Manual Override 1.1.87. By Handwheel, nonclutch
design
1.1.88. Torque Limit Switches 1.1.89. 2 Nos.
1.1.90. External Coating 1.1.91. Dry Aluminium Alloy in
Painted Black

2.20.16. Modulating type FCUvalves

PIBC Two way modulating type FCU valve
The two way FCU valve should be design in such a way that it can withstand a static
pressure of 20 bar and a burst pressure of 100 bar.

The ports are designated in such a way that flow through the two way valve can be
in eitherdirection.

The valve shall be designed to handle the fluid temperature from1degreeC to

95degreeC It can withstand the differential pressure upto 4Bar.

The valve is of bronze body with stainless steel stem and Norylcover.
The FCU valve shall have a minimum stroke length of 10mm so that it has the
sufficient distance totravel.

The hydronic FCU valves shall been designed to meet the European standard EN
60730-2-8.

The actuator shall require the power supply of 220 Volts AC so that no transformer is
required.

The actuator is easily removable from the valve so that in case the actuator fails at
site it can be easily replaced without affecting the integrity of the watersystem.
The actuator shall have the provision to operate manually.
The actuator shall meet the low voltage directive 73/23/EEC. The actuator shall be
selected in such a way that the maximum power consumed by the actuator is
6Watt.

2.20.17. Snap Acting DigitalThermostats

Thermostats for FCU’s should be Digital on/off for Actuating 2 way or 3 way
Valves(Onoff/Modulating)

Thermostats should display Room Temp and Set point simultaneously which is easy
to read from at least 6-8 feet distance.

Thermostats should have Fan Speed Control Switch (Low-Med-High- Auto). Auto
 Mode should be able to save energy by automatically reducing the Fan Speed
when Room Temp Achieves SetPoint.

LCD Display should be available in Blue or Green Backlit for ease in viewing the
Room Temperature and Setpoint.

Thermostats should work on power supply of 230V for on-off models.

The User Settings should be retained in Thermostat Memory in case of Power
Failure

The Switching Relays should be separately wired and should be mounted inside the
Junction

Box, so that the Thermostat front is sleek in mounting. Thermostat Thickness should
be 17mm or less.

Thermostats should have Energy Savings Feature with dual set point which can be
interlocked with Occupancy Sensor or Hotel Key Card input. This should be
indicated in the LCD Display in the mode it is being operated. This Programming
should be possible by Hotel maintenance Staff.

Thermostats should be similar or equivalent to Honeywell Halo Series Digital

Thermostats Model T6861 (on/off) version.

3. EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. All work described in this section shall be performed by system integrators or
contractors that have a successful history in the design and installation of integrated
controlsystems.
B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as
detailed on the project drawingset.
C. Drawings of the BMS network are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not
shown, but required to make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge shall be furnished and installed without additionalcost.
 81

D. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified
or shown on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by this
contractor in accordance with thesespecifications.
E. Equipment furnished by the HVAC Contractor that is normally wired before
installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally
performed in the field will be furnished and installed by this contractor.

3.2. WIRING
A. All electrical control wiring and power wiring to the control panels, NAC,
computers and network components shall be the responsibility of the this
contractor.
B. The electrical contractor shall furnish all power wiring to electrical starters
andmotors.
C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications, the
National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All BMS wiring shall
be installed in the conduit types specified in the Electrical Specifications unless
otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes.
Where BMS plenum rated cable wiring is allowed it shall be run parallel to or
at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and
workmanlikemanner.

3.3. WARRANTY
A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be
warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance.
B. Within this period, upon notice by the CPWD, any defects in the work provided
under this section due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship
shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by
this contractor at no expense to theCPWD.

3.4. WARRANTYACCESS
A. The HITES shall grant to the contractor, reasonable access to the BMS during the
warrantyperiod.
B. The HITES shall allow the contractor to access the BMS from a remote location
for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the
warrantyperiod.

3.5. SOFTWARELICENSE
A. CPWD shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and
all incremental work on the project(s). The CPWD, shall determine which
organizations to be named in the “orgid” of all software licenses.
B. CPWD, or Engineer-In-Charge his appointed agent, shall be free to direct the
modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless of supplier.
C. CPWD, or Engineer-In-Charge, shall receive Ownership of all job specific
software configuration documentation, data files, andapplication-level software
developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software
code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated
for a given project and /or configured for use within based controllers and/or
servers and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and
devices. Any and all required Ids and passwords for access to any component or
software program shall be provided to theCPWD.

3.6. ACCEPTANCETESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, this contractor shall load all system software
and start-up the system. This contractor shall perform all necessary calibration,
testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that
 82

the system is functioning in full accordance with thesespecifications.

B. This contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components,
routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing
shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points
of the DDC systemoperation.
C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests,
point by point as described in the validation log above in presence of CPWD
Representative, as required. Properly schedule these tests so testing is complete at
a time directed by the CPWD Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent
delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy.
D. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when BMS contractor have
performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of CPWD
Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and
review of all correcteddeficiencies.

3.7. OPERATOR INSTRUCTION,TRAINING

A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the
BMS hardware and software has been established this contractor shall provide
on-site operator instruction to the CLIENT/ CPWD's operating personnel.
Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be
performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware,
software andaccessories.
B. This contractor shall provide 40 hours of instruction to the CLIENT/ CPWD’s
designated personnel on the operation of the BMS and describe its intended use
with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the
systems shall include, but not be limited to; the overall operation program,
equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system),
commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator
intervention required in responding to the System's operation. C. The training
shall be in three sessions as follows:
1. Initial Training: One day session (8 hours) after system is started up and at
least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at
least two weeks prior to training so that theCLIENT/CPWDs' personnel can start
to familiarize themselves with the system before classroom instruction begins.
2. First Follow-Up Training: Two days (16 hours total) approximately two weeks
after initial training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal
with more advanced topics and answerquestions.
3. Warranty Follow Up: Two days (16 hours total) in no less than 4 hour increments,
to be scheduled at the request of the CLIENT/ CPWD during the one year
warranty period. These sessions shall cover topics as requested by the CLIENT/
CPWD such as; how to add additional points, create and gather data for trends,
graphic screen generation or modification of controlroutines. Approved
Make List:- Honeywell /Schneider/JCI
 83

Technical Specification
OF

Hospital / Electronic Management

System
 84

Project Objective
The objective of this project is to implement anElectronic Management Systemin order to improve
productivity of the hospitals, thereby improving public health services and administrative service.

The following key objectives needto be met:

1. Data from all locationwill be fed into the Central System

2. Unique IDgeneration of patients
3. Digitization of Patient work flow
4. System will be a web based system that will be accessible to relevant stakeholders on authentication.
5. Better follow up mechanism for patients with SMS reminder and other Health related camps
notifications.
6. Streamlines workflow operations to improve hospital administration
7. Enhances the quality of patient care
8. Unique modular design structure of application to enhance operational flexibility
9. Better management of admission medical records and MLC cases.
10. Reduction in patient waiting time, efficient queue management
11. Simplification and automation of manual processes
12. Transparency and availability of information related to services
13. Efficient grievance redressal mechanism
14. Real-time reporting, efficient analytics and decision support

Project Requirements& Specification

The IT solution should fulfill the following general requirements:

Network
The Solution envisages integration of Software and hardware and Connectivity for the following parts of
Hospital campus
1. Patient Registration
2. OPD Section
3. Billing Section
4. Laboratory Section
5. Radiology Section
 85

Functional Requirements of Solution

Patient Management System (PMS)

The Patient Management System shall broadly cover

Registration of Patients

● The System shall generate a Unique ID for the Patient (called the CRN or UHID
Number).
● "For walk –in patients the system should capture the required demographic details
provided by the patient/ relative. This includes:
 Name:
 Father/Husband Name:
 Registration Type:
 Date of Birth: (dd/MM/yyyy)
 Age:
 Sex
 Patient Category:
 Address
 Phone, Office Phone, Cell Phone, E-Mail:
● "The System should have the capacity to capture patient photo through: Web
cam,Upload"
● The system should have the capacity to upload patient document like Driving
License, Passport etc.
● The system should have edit facility of patient registration details
● The system should allow search of the registration record for existing and new
patient registration.
● The system should allow registration for various patient categories, incuding BPL,
VIP, General, Employee, etc
● The System should allow to enter contact details of patients friends and relatives for
emergency, with edit option.
● The system should display the available registration details / Patient registration
information already existing in the database when any of the above parameters
matches, during the registration process
● In case of "Emergency Registration‟ the system should generate unique ID, with
minimum information.
● The UHID number should be printed in a barcode enabled smart card with patient
name, address and age.

Encounter
● Encounter is a process of linking a patient to a particular doctor"
● The system should allow the staff to select the relevant OPD doctor and specialty/
OPD Room as per the defined roster available for the day.
● The system should allow configuration of maximum number of patients to be
assigned to a particular OPD doctor for a particular day, or for recurring days
● If a patient with appointment arrives, then system should automatically display the
appointment given specialty, doctor and service name.
● If a patient with multiple appointments arrives, then system should automatically
display all the appointments given specialty & doctor, allowing the staff to select the
OPD doctor and specialty on patient's request.
● The system should automatically generate the “Token‟ number specific to the
concerned OPD, for walk-in patients.
● The system should allow the encounter to be modified
●
 86

● OPD Management
●
● Ability to enter and update doctor's appointment schedules
● Facility for authorized users to maintain procedure tables that govern the
scheduling process.
● Ability to allow user definable appointment time slots.
● Facility to allow users to specify rules that the scheduling system will utilize to
determine the "suggested" schedule. (An example of the types of rules needed would be
to allow the user to reserve a specific room in the morning for a specific procedure, such
as for a VIP).
● Facility to allow the authorized users to bypass the scheduling process for a
procedure that is normally scheduled (such as for an emergency or a walk-in patient).
● Ability to select the first available date, time and room to schedule an
examination/consultation based on the parameters selected by the user.
● Ability to allow the user to select a date, time and room if desired for the manual
scheduling.
● Ability to select next available time and room given a specific date.
● Ability for the rooms to be closed and reopened for portions of the day, including
closure on future dates for preventive maintenance or any reason.
● Ability to support user-defined time increments for appointment slots (i.e. 5
minutes, 15 minutes, etc.).
● Facility to allow printing of preliminary schedules for each area/consultant, the day
prior to the examinations.
● System should provide facility to capture referral source information.
● The system should facilitate a convenient queue system for walk in cases needing
immediate appointments
● Rescheduling of a particular facility should be possible by authorized users. The
systems must warn if there are any appointments during the period.
● Ability to prevent appointments from being booked on Public Holidays or Clinicians
leave.
● Ability to cancel a clinic session.
● System should provide the pre-defined list of investigation, minor procedures,
drugs, etc. with easy select options at the operator dashboard
● The system should automatically forward the relevant sections of the information/
data form, to concerned departments, for further action on the patients case as required
● The system should allow tracking of OPD services (investigations, drug dispensing)
and follow up cases, as required
● System should allow concerned doctors/operators to mark the investigations,
procedures, drugs, injections, etc. as "Emergency‟ , so that these Patients will be
sequenced on priority at respective department
● The system should allow automatic flow of test results (investigations) for the
patient to be made available to the concerned doctor, as required, including intimation
of panic values
● The system should allow tracking transfer and referral cases
● Ability to cancel orders/requests not yet processed and automatically to
communicate cancelled requests to appropriate departments.
● Ability to allow more than one request at a time to be entered for an individual
patient without receiving the patient's ID and generate individual requisitions from
multiple requests.
● Ability to allow prioritization of requests
 Urgent/Emergency
 Routine
 Timed
 and print requisitions
immediately for urgent and emergency requests
● Facility to generate test statistics by:
 Speciality
 Consultant
 Ward
 Department
 Test type
 87

 Time.
● Permitting efficient data entry of all orders and documentation by authorized
physicians
● Supporting electronic signature.
● Facility to provide secure, reliable, real-time access to patient health record
information.
● Ability to provide tools including access audit trails, to ensure patient information
confidentiality and security.
● "Facilitate the functionality as physicians’ primary information source during
patients’ encounters. This includes:Patient problem list, patient history and physical
exam, allergies, immunizations, medication dispensed and administered, orders,
diagnostic results and images, and most recent vital signs, progress, nursing notes."
● Ability to include identified allergies for the patient on their file.
● Maintain patient demographic data including height and weight
● Ability to maintain a drug/formulary directory to include the brand name, generic
name, national drug code, dosage form, ingredients for compound drugs, route of
administration and dosages and warn of known side effects and drug to drug
interaction.
● Ability to have on line update capabilities.
● Ability to provide immediate access to all medical, nursing and paramedical staff to
the recommended list of drugs - the formulary.
● Ability to enter a prescription quickly and accurately.
● Ability to avoid duplication of data entry by the use of demographic details already
held on the current hospital information system.
● Ability to maintain the patients records file for lifetime
● Provide option to automatically change patients at time of order entry.
● "Ability to provide security against unauthorized access or utilization of the system
at multiple levels including:
 user ID, password and
personal question
 levels of user
authorization"
● provide restrictions of access to specific drugs and to specific ID
● allow changes in security criteria and parameters by the specifically authorized user,
as needed
● provide audit trails of all transactions carried out by the user
● The system should be able to support Linux operating system.
● Compliance with the international healthcare standards, namely HL7, DICOM,
ICD-10, CPT.
● Ability to use scrolling features for search
● System must be 100% web based, giving the ability to use web browser (e.g.
Chrome) to access systems functions over Internet or Intranet.
● Provide keyboard shortcuts (e.g. Ctrl-C, Alt-F) or menu by fast functions for
experienced users to quickly execute system functions.
● Provide on-line help screens to assist users in all applications.

Emergency

● The system should allow the operator to enter the registration details along with
preliminary treatment details given by the doctors, tagged to the unique ID, through
user-friendly select options
● The system should allow the easy tracking and tagging brought dead/ MLC and
referral cases
● In case of admissions, the system should automatically forward the request to
Admission counter dashboard, with the registration details, and any other relevant
information captured in the system.
● The system should allow concerned doctor to mark the investigations, procedures,
drugs, injections, etc. as "Emergency", so that these Patients will be sequenced on
priority at respective department
 88

● The system should allow standardization in generating discharge summary and

follow-up instructions/ discharge. The system should generate the reports, including
„Discharge Summary‟ in a printable pre- defined format.
● Facility to initiate a "shortened" admissions/registration for treatment where
patients may not have or may not be able to provide identification. And ability to
complete the process later.
● The system should have provision to mark the Medico-Legal cases.

Admission, Discharge and Transfer (ADT)

● The system should allow operator to enter admission related details for the Patient,
along with selection of concerned IPD doctor.
● The system should allow the Admission Counter staff to allocate bed in the
concerned ward. The system should display the status of the beds in all the wards in real
time
● Ability to maintain bed lists by department and ward.
● Ability to analyze admissions by doctor or specialty.
● Facility to allow beds to be taken out and brought back into service, either
individually, by department or by ward.
● "Ability to provide a bed list enquiry which identifies beds that are occupied, vacant
or ready for occupation. Ability to analyze the information by:
 consultant
 department
 ward
 Alphabetical patient
location."
● Ability for Admission Staff to allocate bed.
● Ability to place investigations at the time of planned admissions
● Ability to identify VIP patients and restrict access of information on those patients.
● Ability to enter, update or cancel pending and final discharge.
● Ability to display the transfer request list, impending transfers, completed transfers,
pending discharges by ward and by room and notices of completed discharges.
● Ability to send transfer and discharge notices to specific locations automatically.
● Ability to identify the reason for the transfer request through free text or sets of
codes entry.

Laboratory Information System (LIS)

● Print patient ID numbers (Hospital No., Patient Name, date and time etc.) on
collection labels with bar code
● Sample segregation based on sections (E.g.: Biochemistry, Microbiology,
Histopathology, Cyto, Immuno, Uro etc.)
● Ability to do re-sampling for a test
● Ability to receive samples and acknowledge samples (Barcode based)
● Ability to show list of pending tests in an order
● Ability to show partially reported orders if there is multiple tests in one order
● Tracking of requests send to external lab and results received from external lab
● Ability to have work list based on user defined categories (Pending to report, To be
finalized etc.)
● Support capture and processing of result data from automated analyzers via
computerized interface.
● Provide ability to define delta values (absolute, % change) across facilities and alert
users when delta has been exceeded during result entry
● Ability to alert users prior to release of a result that is defined as a critical value.
● Provide capability to allow a portion of a profile to be verified and reported before
complete profile is verified and reported
● Facility to review and approve the abnormal results in various levels before releasing
the report
● Secure a finalized report from modification
 89

● Ability to highlight/mark visibly the abnormal results on reports

● Ability to set reference ranges for a test with age ranging in day, month, year (for
e.g.: FSH)
● Allow reporting of numerical results to lab-defined number of significant digits per
test.
● Allow reporting of alpha results: Single word (e.g. positive or negative) and free text
(e.g. short phrases or longer paragraph). System shall provide a pull down for choosing
frequently used texts.
● Allow attachment of a comment to any test header or test field.
● Provide capabilities for graphic display of test results.
● Support entry of comments for non-numeric results and interpretative reporting in
result entry screens.
● Maintain table of lab-defined panic, delta, and reference result ranges based on age
and sex.
● Allow manual entry of reference laboratory test results (e.g. non-interfaced
reference laboratories).
● Ability to alert physician once the report is finalized partially/completely
● Provide identification of the verifying technologist when reporting results.
● Support a way to identify the phlebotomist, (doctor, nurse, etc.) in system for
samples not drawn by laboratory personnel.

Radiology Information System (RIS)

● Patient queue system in radiology
● Ability to track patient arrival and patient movement or test progress status
● Ability to handle out referral patients (Patients coming to do a test from out side)
● Ability to distinguish emergency test request (urgent requests) with reason
● Ability to create and use predefined templates for Radiological reports
● Ability to create and use personalized templates for reporting
● Ability to compare the report with previous reports
● Ability to search and add representative images to report (E.g.: from MRI,US)
● Ability to show the work lists (To be reported, To be reviewed etc.)
● Ability to search for a case in the work list using multiple parameters
● Option to search all the cases based on referred doctor, reporting doctor etc.
● Ability to control modifications by any others (transcriptionist/radiologist) in a
report entered and locked by a radiologist
● Ability to keep track changes in case a modification in a report is required
● Ability to track detailed audit trail with who, when, what
●

Non Clinical System

Billings

General
● Ability to define billing area
● Ability to define cashiers
● Ability to define revenue types
● Ability to specify revenue type
● Ability to define consultation type
● Ability to define consultation fee of a doctor based on the type
● Ability to allow/not allow max discounts for consultation fee either as a fixed
amount or as a percentage
Services
● Ability to define service code format
● Ability to define service sections
● Ability to define individual services at organization level
 90

● Ability to keep different charges/rates for different branches

● Ability to define base unit of the service
● Ability to map services to different cost centers (e.g.: Radiology , Laboratory,
Administration etc.)
● Ability to define discount as either fixed amount or as % for the service
● Ability to define services that to be out sourced
● Ability to allow/not allow discounts for consultation fee either as a fixed amount or
as a percentage
● Ability to control access to service by department, branch level
● Ability to map services to revenue type
● Ability to define no-charge (zero charge) services. System shall provide flexibility to
change the charge (if it is zero charge) at the time of billing with remarks
● Ability to define service groups
● Ability to define packages (Packages may have services from different sections).
Changes in package such as services covered, rate should not affect already requested
packages and packages should be automatically depleted over a period of time.
● Ability to use CPT coding for services
● Ability to define procedures and categorize it under specialties
● Ability to define ancillary services covered under a procedure
Beds
● Ability to define bed types and charges associated with that (day charges, normal
charges, guests ) and discounts applicable either as fixed amount or as percentage
● Ability to define bed charge rules (E.g.: Day case, Over night etc.)
● Ability to specify price change active date (price change to be activated on a future
date)
Definition payment mode
● Ability to define payment types such as Cash, Cheque, Credit Card etc. and Modes
such as Visa, Amex, Master etc.
● Ability to define mandatory data elements to capture according to payment types
(e.g.: in case of cheque payment cheque number is mandatory)
Billing
● Ability to bill the patient before/after rendering the service. System shall provide the
flexibility to configure this at service level. (e.g.: consultation charges before rendering
service, registration after rendering the service etc.)
● Ability to put discounts either at line item level or at bill level as a percentage or as
fixed amount
● Ability to view and select services rendered or requested according to the master
setup for billing purpose
● Ability to search for a patient based on patient demographics
● Ability to view and print receipts of a particular patient.
● Ability to view episodes of a patient with consultants name
● Ability to view and print order details
● Ability to view and print test reports
● Ability to generate interim invoices in case of IP patients
● Ability to collect advances for IP patients
● Ability to collect payment and issue receipts in case of interim payments
● Ability to collect payments in multiple modes in one receipt (E.g.: Cash, Cheque,
Credit Card or combination of these)
● Ability to automatically bill room/bed charges as per organizations policy.
● Ability to print detailed invoice for a patient (E.g.: with each and every services and
details)
● Ability to print consolidated invoice for a patient (E.g.: with service group types
like Pharmacy, Laboratory etc.)
● Ability to close invoices. System should not allow users to modify invoice once it is
closed.
● Ability to post closed invoices. System shall pass necessary financial entries at this
stage.
● Ability to refund the amount on the mode collected.
● Ability to cancel a receipt with remarks
● Ability to enter collections received from credit customers
 91

● Ability to enter collections received from parent companies on behalf of child

companies (TPA)
● Ability to generate cash collection report cashier wise for a day or for a period
● Ability to assign cashiers to specific billing area
●

SMS Service
SMS service shall be provisioned by SI to deliver SMS based services to all Patients, doctors Health worker
and other Hospital staff.

Essential Standards and Requirements

The proposed Solutionshall adhere to following international healthcare standards:

a) Digital Imaging & Communication in Medicine (DICOM)

- For images

b) Health Level 7 (HL7)

- For messaging & communicating with HL7 compliant systems

c) International Statistical Classification of Diseases & Related Health

Problems of 10th Revision (ICD-10/ICD-9)
- Controls for ICD coding of discharge diagnosis details

d) Current Procedural Terminology (CPT)

● The Solution software should have the capability to track new born babies using
BAR CODE
●
● The Software should have a Patient Education module which will help the doctor to
educate patients on diseases or relevant issues through videos
● The Software should be based on state –of –the –art Web-based Platform developed
in Open Source, Open Architecture under Linux environment. It should be
interoperable, modular in design, and web client compatible

Application Technologies

The proposed solution should be based on components that can be easily customized to
meet the requirements of the Hospital. Open Source based architecture will be added
advantage for the Hospital.

Some of the features are:

1) Presentation Layer
● HTML : platform independent
● Browser based client : thin client model
● Compatibility with multiple browsers
● No client installation for application

2) Web Server
● Open source Web Server like Apache
● Fast and Proven technology
●
3) Application Layer
● Support for all proven technology for business logic like PHP, Python
● Reusability i.e. component based
● Standards driven i.e. no vendor locking
● Support the Open Source Linux OS
● Easy to upgrade i.e. server level upgrade only
 92

The application should be platform independent at the Server side, and

should allow any operating system from Client side to connect to the application
over intranet or internet. it provide multi-dimensional view of data, MIS reports is
desirable from the application.

Solution Expandability
Proposed Solution will not limit to above mentioned features. It should have modular architecture and
should be able to provide following functionalities in future as per Hospital requirements

1. Medico Legal Case Management (Segregation of Medico legal patient)

2. Admission, Discharge & Transfer
3. Inventory Management System (Purchase / Mainstore / Substore)
4. Pharmacy Management System
5. Patient Examination Module (Physician Module)
6. Referral Management
7. Equipment Maintenance
8. Image Management System & Picture Archiving and Communication System (PACS)
9. Kitchen & Dietary Management
10. Medical Record management System
11. Medical Equipment Interface
12. Blood Bank Management System
13. OT Management & Resource Scheduling
14. Discharge Summary
15. Ambulance Management
16. Laundry Module
17. CSSD Module
18. House Keeping
19. Fixed Asset Management
20. HR & Pay Roll Module with Portal
21. Grievance Redressal System
23. Daily Reporting (Ward, Emergency, OPD, MMC, OT etc.)
24. Financial Accounting System
25. MIS with graphical representation
26. Department Specific EMR Module
a. General
b. Medicine
c. General surgery
d. Obst&Gynae
e. Pediatrics
f. Dental
g. Eye
h. ENT
i. Physiotherapy

Project Execution Approach & Methodology

The SI Vendor should propose and design a comprehensive strategy for project execution, which
should serve the purpose of integration of Software components successfully

List of Approved Make

1. Wipro Limited
2. Tata Consultancy Service
3. TenwaveInfotech Pvt Ltd
4. Ether HIS
5. IICONS
 93

IT Infrastructure Requirements:

Details Total Unit

Server – XEON Octal Core + 32GB RAM + 2TB Harddisk with

1
Hardware Raid

Desktop : Requirement for Medical departments

Intel Dual Core + 4GB RAM + 500GB Hard Disk + 18.5” TFT+ Window
10 / Thin client with Latest Browser

4– Central Registration

2 – Billing section

2 – IPD stations 14
2- Emergency Stations

2 – Laboratory

2 – Radiology

Hardware Printer (Laser Printer – Model: Canon LBP2900)

2– Central Registration

2 – Billing Section

1 - IPD Station 7

1 - Laboratory

1 - Radiology

Bar Code Scanner

4 – Central Registration
6
2 - Billing Section

 Power backup (Existing to be used). All the components like routers, switches,
desktops should be on power backup.

 During Expansion, Hardware requirements will be planned with discussion with

System Integrator.
94
 95

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF PNEUMATIC TUBE SYSTEM

RESPONSIBILITY OF THE SUB-CONTRACTOR OF PNEUMATIC TUBE SYSTEM

Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for complete design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of Pneumatic Tube System on turnkey basis.

Sub-Contractor should provide factory test certificates for the materials used. He should

supply complete set of operating and user manuals for all the systems and subsystems to

be supplied.

All the equipment shall be the as per the standard mentioned in the specifications of the

equipment and as per approved make.

The Main bidder is required to submit the following documents of Sub- Contractor for

seeking their approval from CPWD Engineer:

1. Letter of authority / Dealership Agreement from the Foreign Principal/Manufacturer

for the quoted products.

2. Submit a copy of PAN certificate and Turnover Certificate certified by CA.

3. Notarized Affidavit from Sub-Contractor that it should not be blacklisted or debarred

or convicted or penalized for bid rigging in the past for any of the item or whole by

any state or central government institutes/hospitals in entire India.

4. Any proof that the original foreign manufacturer has its office representative present

in India.

Systems concept

The system will be designed as a single-tube bi-directional operating system which allows transfer from and to all
stations. A central transfer unit will enable communication between the lines. Due to the dimension of the goods to
be transported, the system will be designed in the nominal width of 160 mm.

Technical specifications

Systems description

General

system will be constructed in tube diameter NW 160 mm with a possibility of up to 128 independent sending and
receiving lines. Hands free user friendly Front-loading stations with automatic closing strong metal door for safe
sending and receiving of [Link] on the item to be transported, the transport speed should be
automatically adjusted by reading the RFID chip of the carrier and identifying the receiving station. Speed from 3
m/sec. (blood samples and critical goods) and 6 m/sec. (empty carriers and non-critical goods) with section sped
control by frequency inverter. One general Power Control up to Raid 4 central control unit, designed to enable up to
24 bus communication lines between the devices. Up to 24 personal computers shall be able to connect for the
monitoring of the system, documentation and evaluation. All of the following functional descriptions of the system
components serve solely as a general description of the planned system. The exact technical specifications of the
individual system components are to be taken from the tender and their requirements are to be met. Offers which do
not fulfil the requirements will automatically be excluded from the tender or eliminated after technical approval test.
 96

Frontloading Stations

The stations are to be designed as front-loading stations with powder coated full metal housing and automatically
closing strong metal door when sending out the carrier. The stations shall be fitted with a dispatch magazine so that a
carrier can be inserted at any time even during receiving and ejecting of receiving carriers in a maximum height of
one point one meter. Independent of the system status, no manual or automated doors needs to be opened for
loading the carrier. When a carrier arrives it has tobe slowed down pneumatically using a bypass function within the
station and then to be discharged into a basket. An arrival signal generator, for up to 32 connections can be provided.
Loading of carriers must be possible every time. Even if the station is ejecting a carrier, the loading magazine must be
accessible. All UL listed station must be equipped with an internal FCC requirements tested RFID industrial 125 kHz
reader, so that only carriers with code tags will be accepted from system for sending. Foreign bodies should not be
able to activate a sending process in the pneumatic tube system. The station must be controlled by EMC tested, low
smoke internal microprocessor

boards. A 7” easy touch panel must be included to the station control board, containing following features: . Display
must show the systems status (i.e. ready, sending, receiving, busy, carrier received at station XX, etc.) in plain text.
Touch panel controlled and operated by RS424 tube mail bus communication cable and 30V DC wires only . Colour
indication in RED when system is down and Yellow when secure receive of high secure carriers and automatic e-mail
for arrival identification. . RFID card reader for access control and secure send option, ready for Mifare and Legic
access control . USB port for additional devices like barcode scanner, etc. . Pressure sensitive touch panel (enables
use with gloves or styluses) . Individual programmable quick dial list on every station . Individual programmable
arrival signal off quick dial on every station . IN/OUT control of all dispatched and received carriers for pending status
check of the transaction. . Carrier status indication in different colours for easy visual control. Touch panel surface
protection for easy cleaning

Diverter

The diverter are to be designed as so-called active (own control board) three-way diverter (1 entrance, 3 exits).
Mounting must be possible in any position. Maintenance-free Teflon gaskets as well as contactless position and
optical tube switches are required.

The pneumatic tightness of the device must be ensured by using self-adjusting Teflon gasket rings. The diverters
motor electronic overload protection must automatically reset after being triggered, a manual intervention on the
device is not permitted.

Laboratory station AUTO UNLOAD

The laboratory station must be a full automated soft landing auto unloads station. Special Auto unload carriers are
automatically opening in the station at arriving without any human intervention and releasing the transport bags with
blood tube samples on a soft landing stainless steel chute. RFID readers are checking the home address of the carriers
and automatically sending back. An empty carrier check sensor is checking the unloading of the goods to protect the
system against sending back the goods to the sending station. Error indication comes automatically up when
emptying carrier senor warning and carrier must be unloaded manual. These carriers must be a short carrier type
with a maximum length of 230mm to protect the transported goods against loosens shaking during transport. The
carrier must be in total length one cylinder, without any hinges for carrier lids to protect the goods against blocking
during out loading and damaging during closing the carrier.

Control Unit

Control of the system must be carried out by using power control industrial computer using LINUX OP system. The
system-specific data shall be programmed on site using drag and drop technology. It must be possible to carry out
changes during operation of the system at all times, without stopping the system during the programming operation.
The central control unit should only be designed and used to control the system. The control unit must be designed
to control up to 500 system components and 128

sending and receiving lines. To avoid system malfunctions due to power failure, indexing errors, etc., an UPS for
emergency power supply must be available. PC monitoring (called personal computer) for programming,
 97

documentation, visualisation and evaluation shall be offered optional as a stand-alone unit, which doesn’t affect
normal operation of the system. The system shall be fitted with a standard interface, which allows a PC to monitor all
existing lines or independently perform any necessary programming changes in all lines. Remote access via VPN
connection to the system is to be provided.

To react on system malfunctions due to power failure, indexing errors, etc., the control program must have a purge
routine which activates an automatic purge procedure after system errors and unloads any carrier which may be in
the system to a pre-programmed station. This function must not require manual intervention in the system control,
any carriers stored in the system must afterwards be transported to the intended destination. In the case of failure of
individual stations, the rest of the system must be available without restrictions and without the need for
intervention by a technician.

System software

The following software packages and functions shall be fulfilled and offered Visualisation and Editor Software for
editing, configuring and monitoring the entire pneumatic tube system. Configuration of the system must be carried
out via visual depiction (Graphic Editor) of the system isometrics. The amendment of system components to the
visual depiction shall be done by drag and drop. The software must work platform independent (Windows, Linux,
MAC OS X). Real-time access to the system must be possible for every appropriate authorized workstation connected
to the in-house IT system. The system program must be generated automatically from the created system isometrics.
Any software adjustments in the system (allocation of user rights, changes to station attributes, etc.) must be
possible in-house and without support of an external provider. All data shall be logged on a separate database server.
The visualization of the expected incoming carriers on real-time display (monitoring) must be possible to provide to
the laboratory team.

Line control software

Software for controlling the individual sending and receiving lines History and evaluation Software for tabular and
graphic evaluation of the collected data of all transports. The evaluated data should give a quick and clear overview
of the entire or a defined period of the transactions between the individual lines and stations. The data shall be
securely stored on a separate database server. The evaluation and follow up of the data must be possible with every
industry-standard spread sheet program.

Code tag software

Software for allocation of home and/or destination addresses, carrier identity, as well as carrier priorities (for
emergency transport).

Risk management

oftware for allocation of special user rights and user identifications. Calendar function / scheduled chronological
events Software for allocation and logging of events. The automatic switch on or off of stations according to freely
selectable and at all times adjustable time settings must be possible. Should a station be switched off by the system,
the carrier must be automatically transported to the diversion station logged in the system.

Maintenance software

Software for automatic maintenance of carriers and stations. To ensure the continual maintenance of the carriers
after actual use, the recording of metres travelled (kilometres) must be possible for every carrier. Before the freely
selectable and at all times adjustable mileage of a carrier is reached, the user must be informed via the station display
that the carrier should be sent to the service station to be serviced. The user must have the possibility to decide for
themselves whether or not another transaction should be carried out. If the carrier is not sent to be serviced after
multiple requests (at least 3), the carrier shall be blocked from further transactions and only permitted to be sent to
the service station. Only after the carrier has been serviced shall the carrier's counter be set to 0 by the service team.
An overview of device activity, for the stations and diverters, shall be made available to the service team. The service
team shall be automatically informed via email, according to freely adjustable and at all times modifiable values, that
a device (a station or/and a diverter) has completed the defined number of activities and that a service must be
carried out. After maintenance of the device, the counter shall be reset to 0.
 98

Malfunction reporting

Software for automatic notification of system failure reports. The delivery of malfunction reports of the pneumatic
tube system via e-mail or SMS must be enabled.

System cable

The system's communication and power supply should be transmitted via a composite cable, meaning that all
necessary data and power supply fibres must be fed into one cable with the appropriate shielding. The system cable
shall be installed along the tube.

Power supply

The power supply happens once at a central point. In the case of longer distances, additional power supplies shall be
considered if needed to compensate the voltage drop.

Air supply

The carriers in the tubes are transported by suction or compressed air through rotary current fans with air diverting
units (air diverter). Air ducts shall be provided in accordance with the systems concept. The air regulation on the
blower for slow speed mode shall be executed by means of frequency converter.

Tube switches and position detection

Contact free position and optical tube switches must be used for the entire system, the device positions shall be
monitored via inductive reed contacts.

Device gaskets

Self-adjusting gaskets in diverters and stations should guarantee optimal tightness of the system at all times.

Carriers

Each carrier shall be equipped with a swivel lid and a transparent body. The carriers shall be fitted with gaskets on the
lids in order to counteract leakage of liquids. Wear-resistant Velcro rings shall be used as drive [Link] carrier length
can be 330mm, 400mm or 420mm individual type. In addition, the carriers must be fitted with programmed RFID
transponders on both ends for HOME and SEND address as well as a unique carrier number for carrier identification
and easy carrier tracking. Every transport must be distance counted and stored in the data base. Once the carrier has
reached a given mileage, the carrier must be ejecting at the service station for cleaning and inspection.

Blower / three-phase current compressor

Port for connection of a frequency converter, for generation of the necessary forwarding air in the transport line.

. Designed for a transport speed between: 3 m/sec - 6 m/sec

. With brackets for wall mounting as standard

. All components (fan reductions, wall bracket, mounting buffer, hose clips, connections, etc.) and incidentals
required for function must be included in the delivery.

. Performance data: o 3x380/460V; 2.6 kW

Protection class: IP 54

Feed air volume: 8 cbm/min

Static Pressure: 220 mbar

Volume: 77 db(A)
 99

Model: SU6

Frequency converter

. For automatic regulation of the driving air

. Current vector control for highly dynamic drives with high torque, also at small speed

. Control of 2 speeds (slow speed)

. Short switching time of pressure to suction through power recovery during the braking operation in the DC
intermediate circuits

. Requirements comply with the CE mark

. Complies with UL standards

. Protective function against over current, overload, over and under voltage, as well as thermic protection

. Surface-mounted switchboard model with protective filter

. Possibility of all-pole disconnection from power supply for servicing purposes Delivery and installation according to
client wishes

Air flow controller

. Pressure controller for monitoring of the driving air actually produced.

. It must be impossible to insert a carrier without driving air

. Delivery and installation according to client wishes Pneumatic tube NW 160

. Precision pneumatic tube NW 160; special surface treatment for smooth in- and outside

. Hard PVC in accordance with DIN 8062

. Colour: grey

. Outer diameter: 160 mm

. Wall thickness: 3.2 mm

. Includes tube sleeves, brackets, etc.

. Delivery and installation according to client wishes

 10
0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR MEDICAL GAS PIPE
LINE SYSTEM

A MEDICAL OXYGEN SYSTEM - Not Applicable as per BOQ

1.1 Liquid tank (Indian)
SCOPE OF
SUPPLY
a) Design, manufacture and supply of vacuum + perlite insulated vertical storage tank (Non-Thermosiphon) as per
technical specification and flow scheme enclosed.
b) Design, fabrication and supply of Low Pressure Atmospheric Vaporizer as per technical specification and GA cum
foundation drawing enclosed

DOCUMENTATION FOR STORAGE TANK

Operating and maintenance manual - 1 set along with shipment shall be given.
Quality test certificate – 1 set for Cryogenic pressure vessel shall be submitted along with the shipment. The cryogenic tank Quality
certificate shall comprise of:

a) Approval letter along with approved drawings from CCOE for inner vessel
b) Certificate from third party inspection Agency for inner vessel
c) Material Heat chart for inner vessel pressure parts.
d) Mechanical properties test report for production test coupon
e) History sheet for inner vessel
f) Material test report for pressure parts (inner vessel)
g) Name plate photo copy
h) Certificate of safety valve, pressure gauge, level gauge

DOCUMENTATION FOR VAPORISER

Inspection and test reports - 1 set along with the equipment shall be provided Operation & Maintenance manual - 1 set along
with the equipment shall be provided

INCLUSIVE
· Civil foundation / foundation bolts, any other civil work within battery
limit
· Spares, bursting disc, etc for the equipment.
· Unloading, Erection and Commissioning of
Equipment at site
· Inter connecting piping between tank and vaporizer and downstream of
vapor
izer
· Fencing, gates, fire-fighting equipment etc required on the tank yard layout.
· CCOE license for the usage of equipment
· Cold test at our W orks/Site
· Liquefied gases for commissioning of the system INSPECTION-

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COLD CONVERTERS DESCRIPTIONS UNIT

 10
1

CONFIGURATION - VERTICAL 5306

GROSS VOLUME LIT
NET CAPACITY LIT 5000

INNER VESSEL
MATERIAL X5 CrNi 18-10
DESIGN & MANUFACTURING CODE - AD-2000
MERKBLATTER
EDI. 2004

KG/CM 2
MAX. ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE 17
(g)
KG/CM 2 18.033
DESIGN PRESSURE (Corrected for vacuum)
(g)
KG/CM 2 AS PER CODE
HYDRO TEST PRESSURE
(g)

DESIGN TEMPERATURE DEG. C -156

N2 M3 3985
CAPACITY OF GAS KG 4539
AT 27 [Link]. O2 M3 4927
KG 6401
AR M3 4815
KG 7845

CLEANING DUTY OXYGEN

INSULATION VAC + PERLITE
INSPECTION THIRD PARTY

OUTER VESSEL:
MATERIAL - CARBON STEEL
DESIGN CODE CGA-341, 2002

OPERATING PRESSURE - VACUUM

EMPTY WEIGHT [APPROX] Kg. 3650

FULL WEIGHT [APPROX] N2 Kg. 8189

O2 Kg. 10051
AR Kg. 11495

OUTSIDE DIAMETER mm 2116

OVERALL HEIGHT mm 4121

EXTERNAL SURFACE MECH. CLEANING

PRIMER TWO COATS TWO
FINAL PAINT [POLYEURETHENE] COATS

Exact volume could be +/-3% after stretching

 10
2

TECH. SPEC. OF LOW PRESSURE ATMOSPHERIC VAPORISERS

S.

UNIT
No.

1 DUTY HRS 8
2 CAPACITY - LOX NM3/HR 300
- LIN NM3/HR 330
- LAR NM3/HR 360
3 INLET TEMP. DEG.C -196 to + 40
4 OUTLET TEMP. DEG.C 10 Deg. below
amb.
5 SURFACE AREA SQ.M 85
6 HEATING MEDIUM - AMBIENT
7 MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE KG/CM2 25
8 DESIGN PRESSURE KG/CM2 27
9 PNEUMATIC TEST PRESSURE KG/CM2 30
10 RADIOGRAPHY - NIL
11 CLEANING DUTY - OXYGEN

ASME
12 DESIGN & MFG. CODE -
[Link],
DIV.I
2004
13 MTL. OF CONSTR. TUBES - SB221 A96063 T5
14 OVERALL DIMENSION L x W x H MM 900*1520*2770
15 INLET FLANGE ANSI B 16.5 NB 25
16 OUTLET FLANGE ANSI B 16.5 NB 40
17 EMPTY WEIGHT [APPROX.] KG 280

Note: Specifications are subject to change due to continuous technical up gradation.

Empty weight of the vaporizer might change during detail engineering.

2.0 Oxygen Manifold (Indian) 2 Banks x 15 Cylinders

(Excluding Cylinder)
The oxygen cylinder manifold should comprise of two cylinder Banks which can accommodate 30 cylinders in each
Bank (means 15 working+15 standby) complete with copper tail pipes with bull nose fittings of RH External threading
suitable for cylinder valves conforming to IS 3234 (Oxygen service) and Cylinder support system.

Manifold should be suitable to withstand a pressure of 140 Kg/cm2, along with high pressure copper annealed tail
pipes with Brass adapter suitable for Oxygen Cylinders and manifold. Top frame comprising of high pressure copper
pipes of size 1/2” I.D. x 15swg with high pressure brass fittings made of high tensile brass and connections through
non- return valves.

High pressure copper tail pipes, made of high pressure copper pipe of size 1/4” I.D. x 15 swg.
 10
3

The middle and bottom frame to be provided to fit both round and flat bottom cylinders safely.
 10
4

The manifold should be tested (hydraulically) at 250kg / cm sq.

The copper tail pipes are fitted to the individual non return valves of the cylinder manifold for easy removal of cylinders without
disturbance to system operation.

Each manifold should be provided with one terminal header and a NPT connection for the Automatic control panel.

3.0 Fully Automatic Oxygen Gas Control

System – (Imported) as per NFPA -99 Std /
HTM -2022/02-01 of UK
Gas Manifold should be fully automatic, self – shifting to reserve bank on exhaustion of the service bank without interruption of
gas delivery to the system. A critical connections should be gas specific, non-interchangeable and should be designed to eliminate
gas supply error. The manifold control system should supply a flow of 1000 L/ Min at 50 psi. The dual line regulator/single vent
Medical Gas Manifold control unit should include right and left header bars and pigtails for the appropriate medical gas. The
installed system should automatically switch over to the reserve bank when the primary bank is depleted. When the depleted
cylinders are replaced with full cylinders the system should automatically reset itself in preparation for the next bank change. The
primary side bank in use and the remaining side bank on reserve. This designation should automatically change from left to right
and right to left as each bank is depleted and, in turn, refitted with full gas cylinders.

The LED indicator should show a depleted bank by turning red. A buzzer should also sound to indicate an empty bank. When the
system is reset by replacing the depleted cylinders, the indicator should turn green and also silence the buzzer. If the manifold is
connected to the health care facility’s central alarm system that should also indicate that the bank was depleted and, in turn, was
reset. The only manual activity Medical gas Manifold requires is the changing of the depleted cylinders. When a bank is depleted,
Manifold should automatically switch to the fresh bank, delivering an uninterrupted gas supply to the health care facility.
Changeover is performed by solenoid valves contained in the control cabinet. In the event of an electrical power failure, both
solenoid valves should automatically open to provide an uninterrupted gas flow. Under normal operating conditions, the gas
should leave the high pressure cylinders through the pigtails into the header bars.

The pigtails should have on-way Valves (check valves) to allow the replacement of depleted cylinders with out gas pressure
back-flow into the remaining depleted cylinders on that bank. In the event a safety relief device on an individual cylinder should
activate or a pigtail should leak excessively, the local check vale should also prevent loss of gas from the rest of the cylinders on
that bank.

The gas should flows through the manually operated shutoff valve into the primary regulator. This regulator should reduce the
high cylinder pressure to an intermediate pressure. The intermediate pressure gas flows through the solenoid valve to the line
regulator for its final (Line) pressure reduction for use in the health care facility. Two line pressure regulators should be installed in
parallel, and each should be capable of maintaining a constant dynamic delivery pressure at the maximum designed flow rate of
the system.
 10
5
The solenoid valve should be the key to the automatic mechanism the manifold. This component ensures that the flow of gas is
not interrupted and the pressure does not fluctuate during normal operation. When the operating bank pressure falls to a
predetermined level, which is controlled by the preset pressure switches (high and low) , the switches should
 10
6

activate the solenoids to switch to the fresh ( reserve) cylinder bank .

The manifold control cabinet should have three means of giving continuous information on the system status: first pressure
gauges to indicate the bank pressure and the delivery pressure: second six indicator LEDs , two green that indicate which
cylinders is in use, two yellow for Reserve Ready and two red that indicate a bank is now depleted : third, a loud audible
buzzer gives an alarm when either or both banks are depleted.

The six indicators should controlled by sensing the bank pressure. Replacing the depleted cylinders on the empty bank resets
the system, changing the indicator form red to yellow. At the same time the yellow LED should change to green to go form
Reserve Ready to In Service. LEDs should show red prior to initial pressurization or whenever both cylinder banks are below
the preset value.

4.0 Emergency Oxygen Manifold (Indian) (2 Banks x 6 Cylinder)

(Excluding Cylinder)
The oxygen cylinder manifold should comprise of two cylinder Banks which can accommodate 12 cylinders in each Bank (6
working + 6 Standby) complete with copper tail pipes with bull nose fittings of RH External threading suitable for cylinder
valves conforming to IS 3234 (Oxygen service) and Cylinder support system.

Manifold should be suitable to withstand a pressure of 140 Kg/cm2, along with high pressure copper annealed tail pipes with
Brass adapter suitable for Oxygen Cylinders and manifold. Top frame comprising of high pressure copper pipes of size 1/2”
I.D. x 15swg with high pressure brass fittings made of high tensile brass and connections through non- return valves.

High pressure copper tail pipes, made of high pressure copper pipe of size 1/4” I.D. x 15 swg.

The middle and bottom frame to be provided to fit both round and flat bottom cylinders safely. The manifold should be
tested (hydraulically) at 250kg / cm sq.

The copper tail pipes are fitted to the individual non return valves of the cylinder manifold for easy removal of cylinders
without disturbance to system operation.

5.0 Terminal / Gas Outlet with probes– as per NFPA-99 std /

HTM -2022/02-01 of UK (Imported)

Oxygen
Air-4Bar
Air-7Bar N2O
Vacuum
CO2

Surface mount, non interchangeable, self sealing outlets, outlets should consist of a roughing in assembly and a finishing
assembly. A non removable positive- pin keying arrangement for each specific gas service. Installed in the mounting box a
fully assembled brass secondary check valve.
 10
7
Design of outlet should be such that it should have 100% metal constructon for corrosion resistance fire safety & push
button mechanism for quick release of adaptor. The secondary check valve automatically should form a positive seal to
prevent a gas flow when the finishing assembly is removed. The secondary check valve to include 7’’ (17.78cm) of 1/2’’ Type
K copper tubing with a label affixed which identifies the specific gas by name and colour. A plastic cap inserted at the end of
the inlet tube. Rotation of the inlet tube should allow gas connection from the top or bottom. the finishing assembly should
consists of a die cast

chrome plated cover plate , a machined brass housing for the primary check valve, and a positive –pin keying device to
prevent accidental installation into a roughing in assembly of a dismal gas. The finishing assembly incorporates a double seal
arrangement which automatically engages when a hose adapter or patient treatment device is removed from the [Link]
design of the outlet should be such that if can be easily repaired without disassembly of the outlet.

The finishing assembly should have a colour coded (specific gas) keying disc to prevent connection of hose adapters or
patient treatment device to the wrong gas service. The primary check allows absolutely no gas flow to take place until the
keying devices are engaged. It should be manufactured in accordance with all applicable NFPA and CGA standards. The
locking device should be in the probe instead of gas outlet.

Matching probe for outlets – Imported as per NFPA -99 / HTM 02-01 UL Listed / CE Marked Matching probes to the gas
outlet mentioned above. That is adapter for Gasoutlets each adapter should have suitable barb or threads so that it can be
connected to tube or flow meter /suction regulator. Adapter should have clear gas service embossed on it.

Oxygen Flow meter & Humidifier Bottle with timer facility

6.1 – (Imported) CE Certified/UL listed

with timer facility for critical area

Black pressure compensated flow meter shall be CE Marked / UL listed, or accurate gas flow
measurement with following features:
A) The Oxygen flow meter with time facility should be compact in design with
superior performance in a single package having flow meter body & timer.
B) Control within a range of 0-15LPM
C) It shall meet strict precision and durability standard D)The flow meter body shall
be made of brass chrome plated materials.
E) The flow tube and shroud components shall be made of clear, impact resistant
polypropylene
F) Flow tube shall have large and expanded 0-15 LPM range for improved
readability at low flows.
G) The humidifier bottle shall be made of unbreakable & reusable polypropylene
material and autoclavable at 121 degree centigrade.
H) The Automatic timing of oxygen flow should be as low
as .5 LPM & the time measurement
Should be extremely precise with increments of .1 hour.

6a Oxygen Flow meter & Humidifier

Bottle – (Imported) CE Certified/UL
Listed

Brass body chrome plated Flowmeter with colour coding to match with the gas being used. The housing should be made of polypropylene to ensure
high durability. The flow range should be 0-15 LPM. The Flowmeter should be fitted with matching adaptor (probe) for Oxygen Gas Outlet Point.
The Flow meter should be CE marked/UL Listed.
 10
8

Humidifier bottle should be compatible with Oxygen Flowmeter & it should be reusable type. The bottle should be shatterproof & made of
polypropylene. Metal components of humidifier bottle should be made of brass with anti-corrosion nickel plating.

B MEDICAL NITROUS OXIDE SYSTEM (Excluding Cylinder)

1.0 Nitrous Oxide Manifold (Indian) (2 Banks x 4 Cylinder)

The N2O cylinder manifold should comprise of two cylinder Banks which can accommodate 8 cylinders in each Bank (4 working + 4 standby) for
cylinder valves conforming to IS 3234 (N2O service) complete with copper tail pipes with fittings.

Manifold should be suitable to withstand a pressure of 140 Kg/cm2, along with high pressure copper annealed tail pipes with Brass adapter suitable
for Nitrous Cylinders and manifold. Top frame comprising of high pressure copper pipes of size 1/2” I.D. x 15swg with high pressure brass fittings
made of high tensile brass and connections through non- return valves.

High pressure copper tail pipes, made of high pressure copper pipe of size 1/4” I.D. x 15 swg.

The middle and bottom frame to be provided to fit both round and flat bottom cylinders safely. The manifold should be tested (hydraulically) at 250kg
/ cm sq.

The copper tail pipes are fitted to the individual non return valves of the cylinder manifold for easy removal of cylinders without disturbance to
system operation.
Each manifold should be provided with one terminal header and a NPT connection for the Automatic control panel.

2.0 Fully Automatic Nitrous Oxide Gas Control System – As

per NFPA-99 std / HTM - 2022/02-01 of UK(Imported)
Gas Manifold should be fully automatic, self – shifting to reserve bank on exhaustion of the service bank without interruption of gas delivery to
the system. A critical connections should be gas specific, non-interchangeable and should be designed to eliminate gas supply error. The manifold
control system should supply a flow of 500 L/ Min at 50 [Link] dual line regulator/single vent Medical Gas Manifold control unit should include
right and left header bars and pigtails for the appropriate medical gas. The installed system should automatically switch over to the reserve bank
when the primary bank is depleted. W hen the depleted cylinders are replaced with full cylinders the system should automatically reset itself in
preparation for the next bank change. The primary side bank in use and the remaining side bank on reserve. This designation should automatically
change from left to right and right to left as each bank is depleted and, in turn, refitted with full gas cylinders.

The LED indicator should show a depleted bank by turning red. A buzzer should also sound to indicate an empty bank. When the system is reset by
replacing the depleted cylinders, the indicator should turn green and also silence the buzzer. If the manifold is connected to the health care facility’s
central alarm system that should also indicate that the bank was depleted and, in turn, was reset. The only manual activity Medical gas Manifold
requires is the changing of the depleted cylinders. When a bank is depleted, Manifold should automatically switch to the fresh bank, delivering an
uninterrupted gas supply to the health care facility. Changeover is performed by solenoid valves contained in the control cabinet. In the event of an
electrical power failure, both solenoid valves should automatically open to provide an uninterrupted gas flow. Under normal operating conditions,
the gas should leave the high pressure cylinders through the pigtails into the header bars.

The pigtails should have on-way Valves (check valves) to allow the replacement of depleted cylinders with out gas pressure back-flow into the
remaining depleted cylinders on that bank.
In the event a safety relief device on an individual cylinder should

activate or a pigtail should leak excessively, the local check vale should also prevent loss of gas from the rest of the cylinders on that bank.

The gas should flows through the manually operated shutoff valve into the primary regulator. This regulator should reduce the high cylinder pressure
to an intermediate pressure. The intermediate pressure gas flows through the solenoid valve to the line regulator for its final (Line) pressure reduction
for use in the health care facility. Two line pressure regulators should be installed in parallel, and each should be capable of maintaining a constant
dynamic delivery pressure at the maximum designed flow rate of the system.

The solenoid valve should be the key to the automatic mechanism the manifold. This component ensures that the flow of gas is not interrupted and the
pressure does not fluctuate during normal operation. When the operating bank pressure falls to a predetermined level, which is controlled by the
preset pressure switches (high and low) , the switches should activate the solenoids to switch to the fresh ( reserve) cylinder bank .
 10
9
The manifold control cabinet should have three means of giving continuous information on the system status: first pressure gauges to indicate the
bank pressure and the delivery pressure: second six indicator LEDs , two green that indicate which cylinders is in use, two yellow for Reserve
Ready and two red that indicate a bank is now depleted : third, a loud audible buzzer gives an alarm when either or both banks are depleted.

The six indicators should controlled by sensing the bank pressure. Replacing the depleted cylinders on the empty bank resets the system, changing
the indicator form red to yellow. At the same time the yellow LED should change to green to go form Reserve Ready to In Service. LEDs should show
red prior to initial pressurization or whenever both cylinder banks are below the preset value.

3.0 Emergency N2O System – (Indian) (2 Banks x 2 Cylinders)

(Excluding cylinder)

The Emergency supply manifold should be connected to downstream of the manifold control panel. The
assembly should consist of 4 cylinders (2 working + 2 standby) connection supplying a manually
adjusted regulator via a common header assembly. The delivery system is isolated from the main system by an isolation valve. Pressure gauges should
indicate cylinder and delivery pressure & valves conforming to IS 3234 (N2O service)

C MEDICAL CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM (Excluding Cylinder)

1.0 Carbon Dioxide Manifold (Indian) (2 Banks x 2 Cylinder)

The CO2 cylinder manifold should comprise of two cylinder Banks which can accommodate 4 cylinders in each Bank (2 working + 2 standby) for
cylinder valves conforming to IS 3234 (CO2 service) complete with copper tail pipes with fittings.

Manifold should be suitable to withstand a pressure of 140 Kg/cm2, along with high pressure copper annealed tail pipes with Brass adapter suitable
for Nitrous Cylinders and manifold. Top frame comprising of high pressure copper pipes of size 1/2” I.D. x 15swg with high pressure brass fittings
made of high tensile brass and connections through non- return valves.

High pressure copper tail pipes, made of high pressure copper pipe of size 1/4” I.D. x 15 swg.

The middle and bottom frame to be provided to fit both round and flat bottom cylinders safely. The manifold should be tested (hydraulically) at 250kg
/ cm sq.

The copper tail pipes are fitted to the individual non return valves of the cylinder manifold for easy removal of cylinders without disturbance to
system operation.

Each manifold should be provided with one terminal header and a NPT connection for the Automatic control panel.

2.0 Fully Automatic Carbon Dioxide Gas Control System –

As per NFPA-99 std / HTM - 2022/02-01 of UK(Imported)
Gas Manifold should be fully automatic, self – shifting to reserve bank on exhaustion of the service bank without interruption of gas delivery to
the system. A critical connections should be gas specific, non-interchangeable and should be designed to eliminate gas supply error. The manifold
control system should supply a flow of 500 L/ Min at 50 [Link] dual line regulator/single vent Medical Gas Manifold control unit should include
right and left header bars and pigtails for the appropriate medical gas. The installed system should automatically switch over to the reserve bank
when the primary bank is depleted. W hen the depleted cylinders are replaced with full cylinders the system should automatically reset itself in
preparation for the next bank change. The primary side bank in use and the remaining side bank on reserve. This designation should automatically
change from left to right and right to left as each bank is depleted and, in turn, refitted with full gas cylinders.

The LED indicator should show a depleted bank by turning red. A buzzer should also sound to indicate an empty bank. When the system is reset by
replacing the depleted cylinders, the indicator should turn green and also silence the buzzer. If the manifold is connected to the health care facility’s
central alarm system that should also indicate that the bank was depleted and, in turn, was reset. The only manual activity Medical gas Manifold
requires is the changing of the depleted cylinders. When a bank is depleted, Manifold should automatically switch to the fresh bank, delivering an
uninterrupted gas supply to the health care facility. Changeover is performed by solenoid valves contained in the control cabinet. In the event of an
electrical power failure, both solenoid valves should automatically open to provide an uninterrupted gas flow. Under normal operating conditions,
the gas should leave the high pressure cylinders through the pigtails into the header bars.
 11
0
The pigtails should have on-way Valves (check valves) to allow the replacement of depleted cylinders with out gas pressure back-flow into the
remaining depleted cylinders on that bank.
In the event a safety relief device on an individual cylinder should

activate or a pigtail should leak excessively, the local check vale should also prevent loss of gas from the rest of the cylinders on that bank.

The gas should flows through the manually operated shutoff valve into the primary regulator. This regulator should reduce the high cylinder pressure
to an intermediate pressure. The intermediate pressure gas flows through the solenoid valve to the line regulator for its final (Line) pressure reduction
for use in the health care facility. Two line pressure regulators should be installed in parallel, and each should be capable of maintaining a constant
dynamic delivery pressure at the maximum designed flow rate of the system.

The solenoid valve should be the key to the automatic mechanism the manifold. This component ensures that the flow of gas is not interrupted and the
pressure does not fluctuate during normal operation. When the operating bank pressure falls to a predetermined level, which is controlled by the
preset pressure switches (high and low) , the switches should activate the solenoids to switch to the fresh ( reserve) cylinder bank .

The manifold control cabinet should have three means of giving continuous information on the system status: first pressure gauges to indicate the
bank pressure and the delivery pressure: second six indicator LEDs , two green that indicate which cylinders is in use, two yellow for Reserve
Ready and two red that indicate a bank is now depleted : third, a loud audible buzzer gives an alarm when either or both banks are depleted.

The six indicators should controlled by sensing the bank pressure. Replacing the depleted cylinders on the empty bank resets the system, changing
the indicator form red to yellow. At the same time the yellow LED should change to green to go form Reserve Ready to In Service. LEDs should show
red prior to initial pressurization or whenever both cylinder banks are below the preset value.

3.0 Emergency CO2 System –(Indian) (2 Banks x 1 Cylinder)

(Excluding cylinder)

The Emergency supply manifold should be connected to downstream of the manifold control panel. The
assembly should consist of 1 cylinders (1 working + 1 standby) connection supplying a manually
adjusted regulator via a common header assembly. The delivery system is isolated from the main system by an isolation valve. Pressure gauges should
indicate cylinder and delivery pressure & valves conforming to IS 3234 (CO2 service)

D MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

Duplex MEDICAL DRY COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM -as per NFPA-99 std / HTM -2022/02-01 of
1.1 UK(Imported) (Triplex Compressed Air System)

a) The total plant capacity running and stand by should be 5000 LPM capacity @ 100psi oil-less air compressors and associated
equipment, one vertical ASME Tank and one control panel. The entire system including the receiver should be mounted on a common structural
steel stack base. The only field connections required would be system intake, exhaust and power connection at the control panel. All components
should be completely prepiped and pre-wired to single-point service connections. All interconnecting piping and wiring should be completed and
operationally tested at the site of manufacturer.

b)The medical air compressors should be of the totally oil-less reciprocating air-cooled design. Connecting rod and bearings should be packed
with lifetime lubrication and sealed.

c) Each compressor should be belt driven by a suitable HP, 3 phase, 50 cycle, 415 volt, ODP NEMA construction motor. Slide bases for convenient
belt tension adjustment and totally enclosed OSHA approved belt guards should be provided.

d) Each air compressor should have a capacity of 80 cfm at 100 PSIG, Air Dryer 75 CFM.

e) The system should include individual compressor inline intake filters, discharge check valves of bronze construction, safety relief valves,
bronze intake and discharge flexible connectors, solenoid unloaders, isolation valves, air cooled after coolers for each compressor, high discharge
temperature shut down switches on each cylinder, pressure control switches, as well as copper tubing with shut-off cock for gauge and switches.
The system should include a 120 gallon. pressure storage tank of ASME construction rated for 200-PSI MWP service. The tank should be
equipped with a pressure gauge, safety relief valve, 3-way by-pass; gauge glass and automatic electronic tank drain with manual override. The
inside of the tank should be coated for rust protection with a two component coating which provides a hard, durable lining. Provide spring
vibration isolators for each compressor.
 11
1
f)The system should include a UL listed control panel in a NEMA 12 enclosure with the following accessories for each pump:

g) Externally operable fusible disconnect with door interlock, control circuit transformer with fused primary and secondary coils, H-O-A switch,
magnetic starter with 3 leg overload protection, hour meter, motor running light. Provide the panel with a multiple position selector switch for
selection of normal operation (automatic alternation) or manual selection of lead and lag pumps if one of the pumps is taken out of service due to
scheduled maintenance. Provide audible and visual local alarm (complete with indicating lights and individual sets of auxiliary contacts wired to
the terminal strip for remote alarm indication) for the following: compressor temperature malfunction and reserve compressor in use.

Provide manual reset for thermal malfunction shutdown. All control and alarm functions should remain energized while any compressor in the
system remains electrically on-line. The lag compressor should be able to start automatically if the lead compressor fails to operate.

STANDARD BILL OF MATERIAL FOR DUPLEX

DESCRIPTION Qty
DUPLEX
Oil-Less Compressor 2
Belt Guard 2
 Combination Motor Starters with Circuit Breaker Disconnects
Automatic Alternation 1
Running Lights 100 2
Hour Meters 2
Control Transformer 2
Hand-Off Automatic switch 2
High-Air Temperature Light with contacts 2
Lag On Alarm with Horn, Light & contacts 1
Interconnecting piping 1 lot
Compressors Isolating Valve 2
Check Valve 2
Compressor Inlet flex connectors ( installed) 2
Compressor Discharge Flex Connectors ( installed) 2
System Flex Connector ( shipped loose) 2
Vibration Dampeners ( Shipped Loose) 1 set

D Duplex MEDICAL VACCUM CENTRAL SYSTEM

1.0 VACUUM (SUCTION) SUPPLY SYSTEM – as per NFPA-99

std / HTM -2022/02-01 of UK
( Imported)

Medical Vacuum should be provided by vacuum plant reference and capable of providing a flow rate of 7000 LPM with one pump
running and one pump standby , pumps running simultaneously at a vacuum level of 19” Hg with (4 nos. x 10 HP).

The Oil Lubricated Rotary Vane Medical vacuum System should provided superior performance with minimal maintenance. The
packaged system should contains all necessary controls and components to meet or exceed NFPA99 recommended guidelines. Systems
should be available in simplex and all multiplex arrangements. The factory packaged vacuum system consists of rotary vane vacuum
pumps, pre-wired control panel, receiver, and interconnecting wiring and piping, requiring only two plumbing connection. The
Medical Vacuum systems should be available as base mounted with vertical receiver size .The vacuum pumps should be continuous
duty, rotary vane, oil-sealed, air cooled, direct driven units capable of continuous operation over a working range of 18” to 29” Hg.
Each pump should have single shaft seals and should be equipped with an automatic gas ballast valve to prevent condensation of water
vapor, extending the life of the oil and the system.

The pump should include an integral, multi-stage oil-removal system featuring a built in exhaust demister that should remove and
reclaim 99.9% of the exhausted oil. Additionally each pump should include exhaust back pressure gauge to indicate the need for filter
maintenance and an oil sight glass for monitoring oil level. Lubrication should provided by the integral, fully re-circulating oil
supply. The pump inlet should be protected by means of a wire mesh screen. An internal anti suck back valve should included to
prevent oil from entering the vacuum piping network. Pump vanes, because of their construction, should provide superior heat
transfer and long life. The pumps should be dynamically balanced and virtually vibration free.

Each pump should be driven by a direct flanged three-phase, standard TEFC motor via a pin and bush coupling. All models should operate
between 58-83 dBa,. Pumps require standard automotive grade SAE-30 non-detergent oil for lubrication.

The UL listed / CE marked electrical control panel should be mounted in a control cabinet. The standard control panel includes the
following components:

Integral circuit breaker disconnected with door interlock, across-the-line motor starters with three-phase overload protection
A programmable logic controller to cycle lead pump with each use
Hand off Automatic selector switch for each pump
Lag pump in use indicator light with horn and connection for remote annunciation Hour meters to monitor factory
recommended service
intervals.
Pump running lights to indicate pump in operation.

Each system should includes an ASME coded receiver rated for full vacuum service. The system receiver should includes a 4-1/2” vacuum
gauge, manual drain, and three- valve by pass. Additionally, each system should include properly sized inlet and exhaust flex connectors and
vibration isolation pads for filed installation. the pump has the facility that in case one pump stop the standby pump should automatically
 100

start. if any pump fails the system should automatically revert to the stand by pump. All the status monitoring of the pump can be connected
to the Master Alarm. The system should also includes factory installed 5 micron pump inlet filters to promote longer life.

Standard Bill of Material

Oil-Lubricated Rotary Vane Vacuum System

DESCRIPTION Qty
DUPLEX
Rotary Vane Pump 2
TEFC Motors 2
Back Pressure Indicator Gauge 2
Oil Reservoir 2
Oil Sight-Gauge Glass 2
Air Receiver (ASME Rated) 1
Three Valve Bypass 1
Control Vacuum Switch 2
Vacuum Gauge 1
Manual Drain 1
NEMA 12 Enclosure 1
Integral Motor Starter with Circuit Breaker Disconnect 2
Automatic Alternation 1
Running Light 2

Hour Meter 2
Minimum Run Timer (7.5 hp and larger) 2
Control Transformer 2
Hand-Off-Automatic Switch 2
Lag On Alarm with Horn, Light & contacts 1
Interconnecting piping 1 lot
Pump Isolation Valve 2
Check Valve 2
5 Micron Pump Inlet Filter 2
Pump Inlet Flex Connector (installed) 2
Pump Discharge Flex Connector (Shipped loose) 2
Receiver Flex Connector (Shipped loose) 1
Vibration Dampeners (Shipped Loose) 1 set

3 Ward Vacuum Unit with Suction Jar & metal regulator -

Imported CE certified / UL Listed for critical area

The ward vacuum unit shall be Analog and color coded display type regulator with 100% metal having large, easy to read gauge with gauge
accuracy + 1% of full scale color coded range. The unit shall have 3-Mode High feature and equipped with push to set technology which
shall automatically establish vacuum.

Limit with each vacuum level setting. The vacuum unit shall have a precision in the critical care range (0-600mm hg) and should provide fast
adjustment with turns of the knob up to full wall vacuum thus should instantly facilitate regulated and continuous suction for tracheal and
pharyngeal airway management, surgical procedure and continuous nasogastric drainage. which shall facilitate unrestricted full time vacuum
 100

for emergency. The unit shall be equipped with Positive Pressure Relief Valve to protect patient and unit both in case if accidentally connected
to pressurized gas (O2, Air etc)

The unit shall be made of 100% metal and corrosion & lubrication free having service fee back plate
The Unit shall have following features: Three
Mode Continuous
A) Modes On/Off/Regulation Gauge :
High Vacuum Regulated Vacuum
0-Full Vac
Instantaneous Full Wall Vacuum Mode
B) The regulator should be fitted with a easy read pivoting vacuum gauge with a civil adaptor so that it can be read from
any position or angle by rotating the gauge up to 360 degree.
C) The regulator should have lock on the bonnet so that the reading suction once can not be changed.
D) It should have a stainless steel full line key, a easy to grip on/off valve & an outlet. The Ward Vacuum Unit shall
conform CE marked/UL listed.
Suction Jar Shall have the following
The ½ gallon polycarbonate Suction Jar shall be capable to autoclave up to 121 degree C.
All seals and splatter tube shall be in silicone for long life.
The filter trap in the jar shall be designed to ensure maximum efficiency in preventing overflow and incorporates design features
to ensure the breakdown of foam.
The jar cap must be of metal so that life of jar will be longlasting

3b Theatre Section Unit with

Suction Jar - Imported CE
certified / UL listed

T.S. Unit should have soft touch knob for easy access to (a) On/off mode (b) Regulation mode (c) full flow of vacuum pressure directly form
vacuum line. Mode. The analog gauge should have 2’’ dia color coded; glow – in – the – dark face for easy readability under any condition.
High vaccum setting 0-760" Hg. Suction jar should be made of polycarbonate a autoclavable up to 121ºC. The jar capacity is 1/2 gallon. It
has a positive shut off Metal cap & float assy that intrupts suction to help prevent fluid carryover into the regulator. The float & cap assembly
includes a patient port inlet that is horizontal to help prevent kinking of suction tubing , a vacuum port that is filled with vacuum DISS swivel
nut fitting & an adjustment to allow suspension from the wall using proper accessories. All collection bottle assemblies allow visual inspection
of fluid level, color & consistency & can be steam autocloved or gas sterlized. Polycarbonate bottles offer the additional advantage of
eliminating breakage.

Filter is designed to help protect the vacuum system from contamination due to aerosols or collection bottle overflow. This high efficiency
bacteria filter features a hydrophobic, microporous membrane which filters air with maximum efficiency while helping block the flow of
aqueous fluids and aerosol contaminants.

Filter efficiency is superb: 99.97% D.O.P. retention (.3 micron particle size). Filters are available with 1/8" NPT male pipe thread on
one end to connect to almost any vacuum regulator and a ¼" hose barb for connection of vacuum tubing.

E MEDICAL COPPER PIPE

Copper Piping :

Installation:
Installation of piping should be carried out as per international standards with utmost cleanliness. Only pipes, fittings and valves which have
been degreased as per International standards should be used . Pipe fixing clamps for upto 28mm diameter. Pipes should be non ferrous
suitable for the diameter of the pipe. For the pipes of the sized above 28mm rigid metallic hanging or cemented supports to be used.

The main lines to the building to be taken overhead through metallic poles or through underground ducts with inspection removable slabs, All
pipe joints should be made using inert gas fluxless brazing method. All joints should be of copper to copper and should be brazed by silver
brazing filler material without flux while being brazed joints shall be continuously purged with oil free dry nitrogen to prevent the formation of
copper oxide on the inside surface of the joint. All pipes should be installed without springing or forcing. All pipes should be protected
against mechanical injury in a manner satisfactory to authorities having jurisdiction.
Test: After erection, all the new pipes cleaned or purged with the help of dry nitrogen gas. Complete system should be tested with dry
nitrogen at 2 times of working pressure for 24 hours.
 100

Painting: All existing and proposed exposed pipes/should be painted with two coats of
Synthetic enamel paint & color codification as per international standards. All concealed pipes to have gas identification bands / labels at
appropriate distance. Similarly all pipes which need embedding in the wall should be tested/painted/labeled and properly insulated.
Certification: To be certified that pipes are suitable for the particular service and complete cross connection (anti-confusion) test will be
carried out.
Distribution piping system: MATERIAL (PIPE):
Solid drawn, seamless, deoxidized, non arsenical, half hard, tempered and degreased materials conforming to BS: EN 13348
Medical Grade Kite Marked Pipe
All copper pipes will be KITE MARKED for medical use before dispatch and the pipe will be delivered plugged or capped at both ends.

Pipe sizes to be used as under: 54mmOD X 1.2mm thk

42mmOD X 1.2mm thk
28mmOD X 1.00mm thk
22mmOD X 1.00mm thk
15mmOD X 1.00mm thk
12mmOD X 1.00mm thk

Fittings will be made of copper conforming to BS 864 and suitable for a steam of working pressure of 35 bar and especially made for
brazed socket type connections.

F MEDICAL AREA LINE PRESSURE ALARM:

Medical Gas Alarm – As per NFPA -99 std / HTM -
2022/02-01 of UK (Imported)

2 services
3 services
5 services

Area Alarms are designed to include all necessary displays, factory wiring, transformers and circuitry requiring only 230 VAC primary
powers. Internal voltage should be stepped down to 5 VDC and 15 VDC for control circuit Power. Voltage to external pressure or vacuum
transducers should be 15 VDC.
The Area Alarm should have digital display facility. Each area alarm should monitor up to 6 or 12 medical gas & / or Vacuum services.
Area alarm panels should be modular in design. Each gas monitored should have a light Emitting Diode (LED) display to continuously indicate
actual line pressure. A vertical series of
LED’s should further indicate relative line pressure.
The control module should include a silence/enter button, a Test/Shift button, an Up button and a Down button. These buttons should be used to
silence the audible alarm, set up the alarm panel and to test the alarm panel. The test button should test all modules one at a time. An LED on
the control module should illuminate green to indicate Power on.

The LED should show Normal pressure at 50 psi . apart from Normal it should also show low risk of 40 PSI as low-pressure and 60 psi as high.
High risk of 30 psi as low pressure & 70 psi as High pressure.
Line pressure modules should be available in dual display configuration, dual display modules should accept any
combination of pressure or Vacuum.

The back box should contain factory installed copper tube extensions 6” Long , 3/8” ID (1/2”OD) , to accept installer furnished lines
form the medical gas system.

Each inlet tube should accept gas – specific DISS fittings for transducers, to prevent cross- connection. The power supply should be installed
in the back box Power supply should include an on / off rocker switch and a fuse holder.

The audible alarm tone should pulsate, 90 dBa at 2 meters. The audible signal should be cancelled only by the alarm silence button or fault
correction. The display should remain illuminated to indicate the presence of the alarm condition. The alarm should automatically reset with the
 100

correction of the fault condition. should a new alarm occur while the panel is silenced, the audible alarm should reactivate. The area alarm should
store the last four alarm conditions in memory at the alarm panel. These conditions can be indicated by using the buttons on the alarm panel
control module.

The alarm should be capable to be connected with the HIS system.

Line pressure Alarm panel for Medical Gas Piping System should monitor the following
indication:-
2 gas service :
Oxygen Normal / High / Low
Vacuum Normal /
Low 3 gas service
Oxygen Normal / High / Low
Medical Air Normal / High / Low
Vaccum Normal / low

5 gas services :-
Oxygen Normal / High / Low Nitrous Oxide
Normal / High / Low Medical Air Normal / High /
Low Tool Air (Surgical) Normal / High / Low Vacuum
Normal / low

MEDICAL AREA VALVE SERVICE

UNIT ( VALVE BOX G WITH
ISOLATION VALVE) AS PER
ENCLOSED
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ZONE VALVE BOX CE Marked with CE no./ UL Listed

1/2" x 3/4" ( 2 Gas)

1/2" x 1/2"x 3/4" ( 3 Gas )
1/2"x1/2"x1/2"x 1/2" X 3/4" ( 5Gas)
Adopter having opening by quarter turn of handle. The valve should be pneumatically tested as per BSEN 1057 for twice the working
pressure and degreased for medical gas service before supply. Valve boxes should be equipped with components for shutting off and
supervising individual /parts of central systems in hospital, laboratories and the like. They should be allowed the ward staff to allow isolating
of the areas for maintenance and repair work. The pressure monitoring of the distribution system is done by pressure gauges. In case of
emergency the door can be glass break opened or by un-locking using the key.

MEDICAL LINE VALVE, AS PER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

H
ISOLATING VALVE

15mm OD
22mm OD
28mm OD
42mm OD
54mm OD

All ball valves as per BS 1057 are rated at 400 psig, as well as full vacuum ( 29.9" Hg). Valves go from full ON to full OFF by turning the
vinyl-gripped valve handle 90 0 Locking-type handles may be ordered separately when required. Copper tubing is factory installed to help
prevent valve seat damage during soldering. main and riser valves are not required to be installed in a box unless specially noted or required.
 100

Bedhead panel for Low Equity Ward Areas, 1500mm

length, with provision of Gas I outlets & provided with
electrical sockets & accessories complete as per enclosed
tender technical specifications

Bed Head Panel – CE Marked with CE no./ UL Listed

The system should provide a safe, efficient means of delivering services to patients/staff in general ward application.
The Bed Head Panel should meet the following criteria. Robust design in extruded
aluminum sections
Ability to house medical gas terminal units and Electrical Sockets.
Ease of installation via separate wall mounting plates.
The system should consist of a number of aluminum extrusions joined together to form a carcass to suit the particular application.
Each Bed Head Panels will have three exruded section compartments
. One for MGPS outlets with copper pipe
. One for electrical receptables 6, 6/16 Amps receptacles
. One for low voltage like nurse call, data points & voice points

Each Bed unit should have

· Length of panel should be 1500 mm.
· 1 Nurse Call Button – Provision only
· Gas Outlets as per list attached O2, Air-4 , Vac (Provision
only – Gas outlets calculated separately)
· Provision for Electricals – 2 nos. (5/15 Amps switched
socket)
· Provision for Electricals – 2 nos. (5 Amps switched socket )
· 1 IV Pole with 4 Bottle Holder

Note: All system for Medical Gas Pipe line System must be certified by third party: i.e.(i) - For system installed as per NFPA standard , NFPA
appointed inspector must certified system and relevant documents for inspector must be subitted with bid documents . (ii) - For system
installed as per HTM standard, HTM appointed Pharmacist must must certify system and relevant document for pharmacist must be
submitted with bid documents.

Technical Specifications for

Modular Pre- Fabricated Operation
theatres

J. Walls & Ceiling Construction – (Indian) (cladding type OT)

The inner ceiling will be constructed with 1.60mm thick EGP sheet panel / SS Puff Panel with 120 GSM as per IS 277, backed by 12-mm
gypsum board panel. The Panel will be flame resistance to BIS 1142 part 3. The EGP sheet will be indigenous of reputed make and will be
provided with test certificate. The inner surface ceiling will be fixed to the brick ceiling with essential supports.

The individual ceiling panels will be welded together. All joints will be filled with metal filler (Dupont / 3M) make and will be sanded flush
on site till ready to receive the plastic finish. ceiling panel joints will not be visible after the final wall coating is applied.

The gap between the inside and outside surfaces of the theatre will be variable to suit the architects’ layout, but will be sufficient for the
flush mounting of equipments.
 100

The gap between the inner and outer ceiling will be left to accommodate the equipment at a latter date and to enable services, pipes, conduits
etc, to be run within the gap. All ceiling- mounted equipment will be flush mounted and sealed into theatre. All the sharp edges and corners will
be in radius to avoid bacteria contamination. The ceiling and wall panel design will be such that is allow to installation and support of all
equipment and the provision of openings required for the installations, without affecting rigidity and strength. Access boxes will be fitted to the
rear of all ceiling & wall-mounted equipment to enable maintenance to be carried out from outside the operating theatre. There will be 4
return air ducts with grills provided to meet the HVAC requirements.

K. Sterile Anti-bacterial
Coating – (cladding type
OT)(Imported)

Anti-bacterial epoxy and Anti-fungus sterile coating will be applied on the EGP / SS P u f f P a n e l finished walls & ceiling with atleast
3-4 coats to achieve a thickness of minimum 200 micron. Before application of sterile wall coating an appropriate primer will be applied. The
Primer will be supplied alongwith the paint and will be imported.

The prima will be applied prior to coating of Anti – bacterial & Anti- Fungus sterlite paint an EGP walls & ceiling. 3 to 4 coates will be applied to
achieve a thickness of 200micrones.

Sterile coating and primer will be applied on the surface by air-less spray gun. Sterile coating will be to withstand with commonly used cleaners
in the operation rooms and even withstanding with regular steam cleaning.

We will provide the colour of paints approved by Engineer-in- Charge .

L. Planair Ceiling (Plenum box – Air

Diffuser) – (cladding type OT)
(Indian)

The plenum box (2400mm x 2400mm) will be made of high quality Aluminium 2mm thick & Air diffuser will be made of Woven polyester
cloth that will introduce the highest air quality into the Operation Theatre. There will be 8 H-14 HEPA filters (as per plenum size) with
99.97% efficiency to ensure high quality clean air & tight control of bacteria infection system. Air will be diffused into the theatre uniformly
over the total area through perforated aluminium sheet / SS 304 Sheet. The air distribution system serving to the Operation T heatre will be
tested as per DIN 4799 / HTM 03-01 standard.

The Unidirectional laminar flow installation & lighting system will be design to provide the Operation T
The airflow should be Unidirectional , downwards and the average velocity of the diffusers should be 25 to 35 cfm / sqft. It should have a low
noise recirculation system, compliance with noise level of < 45 to 48dB.

The ceiling will incorporate supports to secure it to the main structural frame of the modular operating theatre.

M. Dimmable peripheral lights– (cladding type OT) (Indian)

 100

Dimmable peripheral OT lights each set having two lights IP 54 Grade will be provided with stepped finish aluminium reflector and
will be of A class for use in clean room application. The peripheral light diffusers will be constructed from opal prismatic diffuser
material in aluminium frames.

Light will be generated from high frequency electronic ballast’s complete with colour corrected fluorescent tubes. The ceiling will incorporate
supports to secure it to the main structural frame of the modular operating theatre. The laminar flow ceiling will be able to provide integrated
lamp support system, ease of maintenance and long life system. Control equipment for the peripheral lighting will be provided in the theatre
control panel to allow independent control of the lighting levels by the surgical team.

The operation procedures can never be affected by shadows, shimmering lights and dazzling eyes. This has been achieved by the lighting
system with sufficient illumination level at the wound site and to provide flicker less design lighting control system

Controls for the peripheral lighting will be provided in the theatre control panel to allow independent control of the lighting levels by the surgical
team.

N. Surgeon’s Control Panel with Separate Distribution Board –

(Indian)

The Control panel will be “Tiled Membrane” type, can be configured to incorporate all the services that Operation Theatre staff required. The
connection between the surgeon control panel and the distribution board will be by a multiplexed system, providing a PWM signal on a
two-core cable.

The panel will contain 6 services Tiles as follows: a). Time day clock
b). Time Elapsed Clock
c). Temperature & Humidity Indicator Indicator & pressure indicator , Hepa filter status.
d). General/peripheral Lighting control
e). Medical Gas Alarm Panel – upto 6 gases f). Hand Free telephone
with memory card.

Time Day Clock will be digital type and clocks have high brightness characters, not less than 30mm in height. Time Elapsed Day Clock will be
digital type and clocks have high brightness characters, not less than 30mm in height. Temperature Indicator will indicate the theatre
temperature will be connected to the local pressure switches of Air-Conditioning system. Indicator will be digital type have high brightness
characters, not less than 30mm in height.

General Lighting System incorporates all the necessary controls of the lighting system inside the theatre. The medical gas alarm will indicate
High and Low gas pressure for each gas service present in the operating theatre and will have an audible buzzer with mute facility. The
medical gas alarms will be connected to local pressure switches located downstream of the last isolation valves. A Hand Free Set Telephone
system incorporated in the panel with memory type card.

The size of the each tile will not be more than 300mm x 200mm. Colour will be RAL 9002 for the frame and membrane fascia. The Control
Panel will be designed for front – access only.

All high voltage equipment is installed in a separate enclosure. The remote cabinet will house the operating lamp transformers, mains failure
relays, electrical distribution equipment and circuit protection equipment for all circuits within the operating theatre. All internal wiring will
terminate in connectors with screw and clamp spring connections of the Clip-on type mounted, on a DIN rail and labelled with indelible
proprietary labels. Individual f uses or miniature circuit breakers will protect all internal circuits. All internal wires will be marked with plastic
ferrule type cable markers, for ease of identification.

O. X-ray Viewing Screen – (cladding type OT) (Indian)

The theatre will be equipped with a 2-plate X-Ray viewing screen. It will be designed to provide flicker free luminance for the film viewing
purpose. It is installed flushed with the theatre wall for hygienic and ease of cleaning purpose. The X-Ray viewing screen is designed for the
purpose of front access. The X-Ray viewing screen will be illuminated by 4 pieces of high frequency fluorescent lamps and the dimming will
controlled by the usage of dimming ballast with Philips make rotary control. The diffuser is able to diffuse the light evenly and to provide
 100

enough luminance for film viewing. It is made of high quality opaque acrylic sheet. The film is held firmly by using spring-loaded clips for ease
of mounting and demounting. The body is built by using electrolysed steel with powder coated to BS standards.

[Link] dissipative Flooring (Tile

Form) – (cladding type
OT)(Imported)

The floor finish in the operating room will be 2mm Static dissipative PVC tiles, laid on a semi conductive adhesive base. The floor finish will
terminate at the room perimeter passing over a concealed cove former and continuing up the wall for 100mm.

Flooring will fulfil EN 649 of US requirements. It will have chemical resistance as per EN 423
. It will have electrical resistance conforming to EN 1081/IEC 61340.

All joints will be welded and the plastic wall finish will overlap the floor coving by 25mm, to provide a continuous sealed surface.

A floor screed will be provided, flat to within a tolerance of +/- 3mm over any 3-metre area. Onto this sub floor, a self-levelling compound
will be laid prior to laying of the floor finish.

The self-levelling compound will be of the type that does not promote bacteriological growth. Copper grounding strips (0.05mm thick, 50mm
width) will b laid flat on the floor in the conductive adhesive and connect to copper wire of grounding

Q. Scrub Station – (cladding type OT)(Indian)

The scrub station will be equipped with 2 bay scrub stations. T he scrub station will be made of 1.5 mm high-grade stainless steel 304 with stain
polish finish and wired to the current IEE regulations & BS 7971. The scrub stations control system will be based on advanced microprocessor.
The scrub station will be sensor-activated 24VAC. The scrub station will be provided with user selectable time out control. The supply will not
be interrupted in case of power failure or maintenance.

The station will be equipped with thermostatic mixing valve to control the temperature of hot / cold water supply. The washing faucet will be
made of Chrome plated brass hand.

R. Swievel Single arm Anathesia

Ceiling Pendent - Imported

Multimovement Pendent is a new design motorized Single arm (1000mm)with up & down movement of 515 mm and load carrying capacity
of 80 kg. The arm can be rotated upto 330º- 340ºwith adjustable stopper. An extremely quite electric motor reduces noise to a minimum,
dampened stoppers and very low hand forces for horizontal movements contribute to an ergonomically optimised workplace. The newly
developed electromagnetic/pneumatic brake system can be adapted to various safety requirements and construction facilities. Modern and
very quite, high performance motors as well special spindles are used to realise precise & steady movement. As a safety feature the motor is
equipped with an over load protection. The large interior cross section for supply lines offers completely new applications with 120 mm
diameter. The stoppers are infinitely variable from 0-330º-340º
service head is provided with the modular design octagonal in shape to achieve maximum supply with minimum required [Link] head
is designed to hosts, Base, Gas Module, Electric Module and shelves . Upto 8 Gas outlets & 10 Electrical switches. Racks & shelves are
provided to mount the equipments like monitor etc. The total length of the manager is 800mm. Surgeon pendent will have 2 arms with shelves
as per following details:
a. Horizontal arm system - 1
b. Weight carrying capacity - 80kg
c. 5/15 Amp. Electrical sockets without switches - 8 to 10 Nos.
d. shelfs with side rails - 4 Nos.
 100

e. provision to fix Gas outlets(i.e.) Oxygen- 2, Vaccum- 2, Air 4 bar-1, Air 7 bar-1, N2O -1 & WAGD-1
no.
f. Gas interface set for interface plate - 1
g. Ceiling mounting system for interin ceiling upto 1000 - 1
h. Interface plate with electrical fittings - 1
i. Ceiling cover for interin ceiling - 1

[Link] Double arm Surgeon Pendent ( Imported )

Multimovement Pendent is a new design motorized (1000+800) arm with up & down movement of 515 mm and load carrying capacity of 80
kg. The arm can be rotated upto 330º- 340ºwith adjustable stopper. An extremely quite electric motor reduces noise to a minimum, dampened
stoppers and very low hand forces for horizontal movements contribute to an ergonomically optimised workplace. The newly developed
pneumatic brake system can be adapted to various safety requirements and construction facilities. Modern and very quite, high performance
motors as well special spindles are used to realise precise & steady movement. As a safety feature the motor is equipped with an over load
protection. The large interior cross section for supply lines offers completely new applications with 120 mm diameter. The stoppers are
infinitely variable from 0-330º-340º
service head is provided with the modular design octagonal in shape to achieve maximum supply with minimum required [Link] head
is designed to hosts, Base, Gas Module, Electric Module and shelves . Upto 8 Gas outlets & 10 Electrical switches. Racks & shelves are
provided to mount the equipments like monitor etc. The total length of the manager is 1000mm. Surgeon pendent will have 2 arms with
shelves as per following details:
a. Horizontal arm system - 2
b. Weight carrying capacity - 80kg
c. 5/15 Amp. Electrical sockets without switches - 8Nos.
d. Shelfs with side rails - 2 Nos.
e. provision to fix Gas outlets(i.e.) Oxygen- 2, Vaccum- 2, Air 4 bar-1, Air 7 bar-1 & WAGD-1 no.
f. Gas interface set for interface plate - 1
g. Ceiling mounting system for interin ceiling upto 1000 -1
h. Interface plate with electrical fittings - 1
i. Ceiling cover for interin ceiling - 1

T. Automatic Sliding Door

The main door will be of Single Flap with frame

Size 1800 mm wide x 2100 mm height and
Size 1000 mm wide x 2100 mm height

Frames

The constructions Frames will be in accordance with the existing prefabricated wall thickness, with the necessary anchors for hidden fastenings
to the wall panel, with horizontal upper drive gear boxes and in the double door width, included hinged-up inspection fascia. Running in front
of the wall. Floor instand for the frame pillar: 30 mm.

The frames will be provided in Aluminium extruded profiles which will withstand better structural load. Aluminium profiles will be anodised
to make dust free. The frame thickness will be 2.0mm & sheet thickness will be 1.5mm The apparent frames will have a width of 50 mm. only
extruded profiles shall be used for construction of frames.
Sandwich door leaf of thickness 35 – 40 mm will be completely covered with a high-density solid care board for silent movement and in order
to prevent the door from buckling by using a special glue on both sides, steel ground to grain size 240, enamell

Door leaves

Sandwich door leaf of thickness 35 – 40 mm will be completely covered with a high-density solid care board for silent movement and in order
to prevent the door from buckling by using a special glue on both sides, steel ground to grain size 240, enamelled or coated.
The total thickness shall be 60mm

The door leaves will be manufactured without impact at the front surface. They will close tightly and side .A rubber rebate will be installed at
the front and rear to prevent the door from closing sharply.

Each leaf will have:

A pull steel handles on one wall at each side, which allows the door to be opened with hand, elbow and knee.
 100

Moderately heavy mortise lock, upward closing, pre-fitted for profile cylinder, including closing angle, basquill rod and 2 steel cover collars.
Inspection window
An inspection window will be installed in the, glass strips in stainless steel sheet of thickness 1,5 mm, with glass 35 mm (window above 70 mm).

Coating in NCS-colour in accordance with the architect’s / hospital’s choice. Double panes with 2 laminated safety glasses and blinds (with
automatic stop), installed hermetically between the windows.
The window size will be 300x300mm

U. Vertical Blend Motorized Window (Indian)

Window made of double glaze glass with vacuum impregnation with motorized vertical blends. Window size should be 1800 mm x 1500 mm.

V LED light-Double Dome (imported) CE certified / UL listed

(a) The double dome operating light must be designed for the use in high demanding surgical procedures. State-of-the-art LED bulbs
should be used to ensure a low energy consumption and a long service life.
(b) Outer handles at the light head should be provided to allow for non-sterile positioning.
(c) Light head must be designed with smooth transitions and surfaces, without slots, gaps or exposed screwing to ensure fast and
effective cleaning.
(d) The light head with streamlined shape is favourable within laminar flow. The light head must be resistant to disinfectant.
(e) For sterile positioning an ergonomic, exchangeable and centrally positioned sterile handle within the light head should be
provided.

(f) All main joints of surgical light must be provided with unlimited rotation (360°). Light head and suspension must be sealed dustproof.
(g) Color temperature should be homogeneous at every illumination intensity.
(h) Control of illumination intensity must be possible via wall control panel

(i) Classification
a. Protection class acc. to IEC 60601-1 -
i. Mains connection component - Protection class 1
ii. Light head – SELV
b. Protection class acc. to IEC 60529
i. Arm system/mains connection component - IP 30
ii. Light head - IP 42
c. Classification in accordance with EU Directive 93/42/EEC Annex IX -
Class I
d. UMDNS-Code (Universal Medical Device Nomenclature System ) - 12-282
e. IEC 60601-1 - Medical electrical equipment – Section 1- 1
f. IEC 60601-2-41 - Medical electrical equipment – Section
2-41
g. IEC 60601-1-2 - Medical electrical equipment – Section 1-2

(j) The surgical light should be complete with all components for ceiling mount and electrical feed-in, incl. finalised installation.

(k)Technical data for main dome: - 1nos.

i. Central illumination intensity Ec 160000 Lux
ii. Light field diameter at a distance of 1 m 200 mm
iii. Depth of illumination L1+L2 1300 mm
iv. Average Color rendering index Ra 95
v. Color rendering index R9 (red) 93
vi. Color temperature 5000K
vii. Central illumination at 1m distance with:
 100

I. Tube 100%
II. one mask: 40%
III. tube and one mask: 40%
IV. two masks: 48%
V. tube and two masks: 48%
viii. Central irradiance Ee 580 W/ m² ± 50 W/ m²
ix. Ee/Ec ratio - 3.5 W/m2 x Lux
x. Adjusting the illumination intensity 40000 to 160000 Lux
xi. Number of LED 66 units
xii. Number of LED stripes 11 units
xiii. Service life LED bulbs approx. 30000 hours
xiv. Replacement of LED bulbs possible
xv. Ambient light mode (Endolight) 300 Lux
xvi. Diameter of light head 620 mm

(L) Technical data for satellite dome - 1 nos.

i. Central illumination intensity Ec 120000 Lux

ii. Light field diameter at a distance of 1 m 200 mm
iii. Depth of illumination L1+L2 1300 mm
iv. Average Color rendering index Ra 95
v. Color rendering index R9 (red) 93
vi. Color temperature 5000K
vii. Central illumination at 1m distance with:
I. Tube
100%
II. one mask: 41%
III. tube and one mask: 41%
IV. two masks: 49%

V. tube and two masks:

49%
viii. Central irradiance Ee 430 W/ m² ± 50 W/ m²
ix. Ee/Ec ratio - 3.5 W/m2 x Lux
x. Adjusting the illumination intensity 40000 to 120000 Lux
xi. Number of LED 48 units
xii. Number of LED stripes 8 units
xiii. Service life LED bulbs approx. 30000 hours
xiv. Replacement of LED bulbs possible
xv. Ambient light mode (Endolight) 300 Lux

xvi. Diameter of light head 620 mm

W Storage Unit
(Indian)

The storage unit should be made with 1.50 mm thick EGP Zinc coated sheet panels. Storage Cabinet should be divided in two equal parts
and each part should have individual glass doors with high quality locking system. Each part should be provided with racks.
 100

X Pressure Relief
Damper (Indian)
Pressure Relief Dampers should be provided in each room to prevent cross contamination of air from clean and dirty areas. Suitably sized
air pressure relief damper should be strategically placed, enabling differential room pressure to be maintained and ensure that when
doors are opened between clean and dirty area. Counter-weight balancing system should be provided in the PRD to maintain positive
pressure inside the operation room. Air pressure stabilizers should have unique capability of controlling differential pressure to close
tolerance. The PRD should remain closed at pressure below the set pressure and should open fully at pressure only fractionally above
the threshold pressure. Blades should be of SS304 grade.

Y Writing Board
(Indian)

One Operating List Board should be provided in each Operating Theatre and should be made of Ceramic Magnetic white board. Operating
List Board should be flush mounted.

Additional Conditions for MGPS and MOT

The bidder should submit original leaflet and letter of authority from the manufacturer of BS EN 13348 Kite Marked
Medical Grade copper pipe and fittings before taking up the work of MGPS and MOT in hand to Engineer – In – Charge.